menu icon
subscribe
search icon

Chocolate Lava Cake

by 7 Comments

If you’re a chocolate lover and looking for a show-stopper dessert, this one is for you.

There is something truly magical about this dessert. When your guests first dig into the tender cake, you will be amazed at their reactions. Then just wait for their reactions when they take the first bite. We love to serve it with a scoop of homemade vanilla ice cream, but even just the cake by itself is unforgettable.

A chocolate lave cake sitting on a white dessert plate that has been dusted with powdered sugar with a fresh cranberry sitting next to it.

How To Make Chocolate Lava Cake

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

The Tools You Will Need

Ramekins – 6 oz are best, but 8 oz will work, too.
Double boiler – Or place a metal bowl over a pot of lightly simmering water.
Sharp knife – For cutting around the cooked cakes.

There are just a handful of ingredients for these cakes, but the measurements are critical. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Butter – Unsalted. You’ll need to melt some for greasing the ramekins and then more for melting with the chocolate.
Cocoa powder – Unsweetened.
Dark chocolate – 60% bittersweet chocolate is recommended. We use Ghiradelli.
Eggs – You’ll need both whole eggs and egg yolks.
Sugar – Granulated.
Flour – All-purpose.

EXPERT TIP: Brush your ramekins with melted butter, chill them, and then brush with a second layer of melted butter and a dusting of cocoa powder not only makes removing the baked cakes easier, it maintains the chocolate appearance for serving.

An overhead view of a six small ramekins that have been greased with butter on the inside and then dusted with cocoa powder.

Tips for Making Perfect Chocolate Lava Cakes

Choose High-Quality Chocolate – Use high-quality dark chocolate for the best flavor and texture. The chocolate should have a cocoa content of at least 60% to ensure a rich taste and a smooth melting consistency.

Melt Chocolate and Butter Together – Gently melt the chocolate and butter together using a double boiler or in short bursts in the microwave. This ensures they combine smoothly and prevents the chocolate from seizing, resulting in a silky batter.

Don’t Overmix the Batter – When combining the melted chocolate with the eggs and flour, mix until just combined. Overmixing can lead to a denser texture, which may prevent the lava center from forming properly.

Properly Grease the Ramekins – Generously grease the ramekins with butter and dust them with cocoa powder to prevent sticking. This step is crucial for ensuring the cakes release easily after baking, allowing you to achieve that perfect molten center when you invert them onto a plate.

EXPERT TIP: Do your best to add equal amounts of batter across all of the ramekins. Start with one large spoonful in the first and then continue with the rest, and then add more across all ramekins that are filled. They should be about two-thirds full.

A person using a silver spoon to transfer a chocolate cake batter into a small ramekin that has been greased and dusted with cocoa powder.

How To Serve

You’ll definitely want to time these so they are served soon after they come out of the oven.

If you wait too long, the molten interior will thicken and no longer flow when cut into

We use a fine-mesh sieve to dust the tops of the cakes with powdered sugar. A nice tart fruit, such as cranberries, is the perfect complement to the richly sweet cake.

A scoop of homemade vanilla ice cream or a dollop of whipped cream is a wonderful addition, too.

EXPERT TIP: Don’t overcook the cakes! The sides will just start to pull away from the edge of the ramekin when you remove them from the oven. There may be some simmering chocolate on the sides of the cake. This is normal. Allow the cakes to rest for 3 to 5 minutes before inverting them. Test one cake, if it’s too gooey, place them all back in the oven for another 2 minutes.

An overhead view of two rows of ramekins that are filled with baked chocolate lava cakes.

Other Amazing Chocolate Dessert Recipes to Try

If you love chocolate as much as we do, you will want to try each and every one of these recipes. They are decadent and so delicious!

These are all a chocolate lover’s dream come true. But, in the meantime, isn’t this chocolate masterpiece calling your name?

A straight-on view of a chocolate lava cake that has been cut into revealing the gooey chocolate interior.

This dessert is not only stunning in presentation, the taste is off the charts.

It’s perfect for any special occasion.

If possible, weigh the ingredients on a kitchen scale, and keep an eye on the cakes as they bake.

Every bite is a chocolate lover’s dream come true.

A spoon being raised with a serving of gooey chocolate lava cake on it with the half-eaten cake in the background.

Ready to make the best chocolate dessert of all time? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A chocolate lave cake sitting on a white dessert plate that has been dusted with powdered sugar with a fresh cranberry sitting next to it.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Chocolate Lava Cake

This is one of those "special occasion" desserts that is a chocolate lover's dream come true. A kitchen scale ensures the exact measurements, but, if you don't have a scale, you'll still be okay if you follow the recipe exactly. Be sure to serve the cakes soon after they come out of the oven. Get ready for raves!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time13 minutes
Resting time3 minutes
Total Time36 minutes
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American / French
Servings: 8
Calories: 568kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoon unsalted butter melted
  • cocoa powder for dusting
  • 6 oz dark chocolate 60% bittersweet baking chocolate
  • 13 tablespoon unsalted butter chilled and cubed
  • 4 large eggs
  • 4 large egg yolks
  • 6.7 oz sugar a little less than 1 cup (192 grams)
  • 6.6 oz all-purpose flour a little more than 1 cup (187 grams)
  • confectioners' sugar for dusting
  • 1 cup fresh cranberries for garnish, optional

Instructions

  • Brush melted butter on the inside of the ramekins. Place in the freezer for 10 to 15 minutes. Brush with more melted butter and then sprinkle the cocoa powder inside the ramekins. Shake to completely coat the ramekins, and then tap out excess.
    3 tablespoon unsalted butter, cocoa powder
  • Use a double boiler (with water in the bottom pot) or a heatproof bowl over a bowl of simmering water to gently melt the chocolate and butter. Remove from heat and let cool for 10 minutes.
    6 oz dark chocolate, 13 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • In a large bowl, use an electric hand mixer to beat together the eggs, egg yolks, and sugar until so thick that a spoon dragged across the top of the mixture leaves a trail.
    4 large eggs, 4 large egg yolks, 6.7 oz sugar
  • Sift the flour into the egg mixture and then beat until incorporated. Pour the melted chocolate mixture into the egg mixture one-third at a time, beating well between additions until completely combined.
    6.6 oz all-purpose flour
  • Evenly divide the mixture across the prepared ramekins. Chill them for 20 minutes.
  • Preheat oven to 400°F while the cakes are chilling.
  • Place ramekins on a baking sheet and cook for 13 minutes, or until the tops are solid and just starting to pull away from the sides. Remove from the oven and let rest in the ramekins for 3 to 5 minutes.
  • Use a thin sharp knife to loosen the sides of the cake from the sides of the ramekins. Invert the cakes onto serving plates and gently remove them from the ramekins.
  • Sprinkle with confectioner's sugar and garnish with fresh fruit, if desired. Serve at once.
    confectioners' sugar, 1 cup fresh cranberries

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Weighing the dry ingredients ensures the exact volume for each, however, if you measure them out following the notes in the "ingredients" section, you'll be fine. 
After removing from the oven, invert a test cake. If the cake is not fully set around the edges, place the ramekins back in the oven for another couple of minutes. 
Leftovers can be reheated in the microwave on HIGH for about 1 minute. 

Nutrition

Calories: 568kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 246mg | Sodium: 48mg | Potassium: 228mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 966IU | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 4mg

Glazed Ham Loaf

by 4 Comments

Glazed ham loaf is a fantastic way to repurpose your leftover holiday ham into a new and flavorful dish. You can easily grind the ham using a meat grinder or a food processor, ensuring a smooth texture that enhances the savory blend of taste and makes it enjoyable for the whole family.

A glazed ham loaf sitting on a small cutting board and has a few slices cut sitting next to sprigs of thyme and rosemary.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧅 The Ingredients

The ingredients for glazed ham loaf include ground ham and pork, along with traditional meatloaf components like breadcrumbs, eggs, and seasonings, resulting in a moist and delicious loaf bursting with flavor. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

A large glass bowl filled with ground pork and ham, breadcrumbs, eggs, and seasonings for glazed ham loaf.

🍶 Substitutions and Variations

  • Ham – We use a combination of ground ham and ground pork for this loaf. We use our meat grinder to grind the ham, but you could also grind it in a food processor, working in batches. If you don’t have leftover ham, then purchase a smoked ham, or even a couple of ham steaks from the supermarket, and it will still be delicious!
  • Breadcrumbs – These help to bind the loaf and absorb liquid from the pork. We use Panko breadcrumbs, but any variety will work, even finely ground bread.
  • Dairy – Half and half can be substituted for the milk. We don’t recommend heavy cream (it’s too thick).
  • Flavor enhancers – Go with your favorite herbs. We recommend fresh, but you can easily substitute dried; just use half the amount than what is called for fresh. Chopped onion adds a depth of flavor, but is not overpowering at all. You can substitute 1 tablespoon of onion powder.

🌡️ The Tools You Will Need

  • Meat grinder – If you don’t have a meat grinder, you can grind the ham (in batches) in your food processor. You could also ask your local butcher if he/she could grind it for you. Or, just dice the ham with a large, sharp knife.
  • Loaf pan – A 1 lb. pan works perfectly. Non-stick is great. No matter what, just be sure to grease the pan liberally before adding the loaf mixture.
  • Digital thermometer – This critical kitchen tool will ensure your ham loaf reaches an internal temperature of 145°F.
  • Silicon mat – Or parchment paper. This makes clean-up much, much easier.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

Expert Tip

We find that your clean hands are the best tools for mixing the ingredients for the loaf. Be sure everything is fully combined before adding to the loaf pan. Be sure to wash your hands immediately after mixing the ingredients.

How To Make Glazed Ham Loaf

Ground ham exuding from a meat grinder into a glass bowl.
  1. Step 1: Grind leftover ham through a meat grinder or in a food processor. 
A large glass bowl filled with ground pork and ham, breadcrumbs, eggs, and seasonings for glazed ham loaf.
  1. Step 2: Add all of the ham loaf ingredients into a large bowl. 
A person pressing compacting a ham mixture for ham loaf into a metal loaf pan on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 3: Press the ham mixture into a greased loaf pan. 
A person pulling a loaf pan away from an inverted uncooked ham loaf on a silicone mat-lined baking sheet.
  1. Step 4: Invert the pan to release the meatloaf onto a baking sheet. Bake for 45 minutes. 
A saucepan filled with Dijon mustard, brown sugar, and apple cider vinegar.
  1. Step 5: Boil the brown sugar, vinegar, and Dijon in a saucepan and then simmer for a few minutes. 
A person using a pastry brush to apply a glaze to a baked ham loaf on a baking sheet.
  1. Step 6: Bake for another 45 minutes, basting every 15 minutes. Remove from oven and baste again. 

Expert Tip

It’s important to spray (or grease with softened butter) the inside of the loaf pan before adding the loaf mixture. Once you invert the pan, you will need to whack the top a few times with the handle of a wooden spoon. If the loaf is stubborn, bang the inverted pan a few times to help release it. You can also just form the loaf on the baking sheet with your hands.

🍽️ How To Serve

  • You’ll need to let the loaf rest for at least 15 minutes after it comes out of the oven. If you slice into it too early, it might fall apart on you.
  • This is pure comfort food and is begging for classic sides such as best mashed potatoes and Southern-style green beans.
  • And, remember, you’ll want to save plenty of the glaze to serve at the table. It’s wonderful drizzled over the top of the sliced ham loaf.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can Glazed Ham Loaf Be Made In Advance?

Yes! Form the loaf into the loaf pan and wrap tightly with plastic wrap and refrigerate for up to 3 days.

Can Other Ground Meats Be Substituted for Glazed Ham Loaf?

Yes! Ground turkey works wonderfully. We recommend keeping the ground pork for additional moisture. Ground beef and pork are traditional and delicious.

Can I Freeze Glazed Ham Loaf?

Yes! It freezes wonderfully. Wrap in foil or butcher’s paper and freeze for 2 to 3 months. Allow to thaw before reheating (or baking).

A white dinner plate filled with a serving of slized glazed ham loaf on a pile of mashed potatoes next to Southern-style green beans.

😋What to Serve with a Ham Loaf

Ready to turn leftover ham into one of the most delicious meals of all time? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A glazed ham loaf sitting on a small cutting board and has a few slices cut sitting next to sprigs of thyme and rosemary.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Glazed Ham Loaf

If you have leftover ham, or if you're looking for a new way to serve ham, this is the recipe for you. The loaf is tender, juicy, and deep in flavor. Be sure to leave plenty of the glaze for passing at the table. Leftovers are amazing!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 30 minutes
Resting time20 minutes
Total Time2 hours 10 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 657kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 loaf pan
  • 1 Baking sheet lined with a silicon mat or parchment paper

Ingredients

  • Cooking spray
  • 1½ lbs ham ground
  • 1 lb pork ground
  • 1 medium onion chopped, about 1 cup
  • 1 cup Panko breadcrumbs
  • ½ cup tomato sauce
  • ¼ cup whole milk
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon thyme fresh, chopped, or 1 teaspoon dried
  • 1 tablespoon parsley fresh, chopped, or 1 teaspoon dried
  • ¼ cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For the Glaze

  • 1½ cups brown sugar dark or light
  • ½ cup apple cider vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Liberally spray your loaf pan with cooking spray. Line a baking sheet with a silicon mat or parchment paper (this makes clean-up much easier).
    Cooking spray
  • Add all of the loaf ingredients into a large bowl and use your clean hands (or a couple of wooden spatulas) to mix everything until fully combined.
    1½ lbs ham, 1 lb pork, 1 medium onion, 1 cup Panko breadcrumbs, ½ cup tomato sauce, ¼ cup whole milk, 2 large eggs, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon thyme, 1 tablespoon parsley, ¼ cup Parmesan cheese, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Pack the meat mixture into the prepared pan. Invert the pan onto the baking sheet and use the end of a handle on a wooden spatula or spoon to bang the bottom of the pan (this will help free the loaf from the pan). If the loaf is not coming out of the pan, give the pan a few sturdy "bangs" onto the pan. It will eventually come out, keep at it.
  • Bake the loaf for 45 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, add the brown sugar, vinegar, and mustard into a medium-sized saucepan over medium heat. Bring to a boil, then lower the heat and gently simmer for about 3 minutes. Set aside.
    1½ cups brown sugar, ½ cup apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • After 45 minutes of baking, you'll need to bake it for another 30 to 45 minutes, applying the glaze around every 15 minutes. The internal temperature should be 160°F to 165°F. Remove the ham from the oven and add another layer of glaze. Pour the remaining glaze into a vessel to serve at the table with the loaf. Let the ham rest for 15 to 30 minutes before slicing.
  • Slice and serve with extra glaze on the side.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
You’ll want to cook the loaf until it reaches an internal temperature of 160 to 165°F. A meat thermometer makes this easy. 
Leftovers are amazing and will keep in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. The loaf can be frozen (cooked or uncooked) for up to 3 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 657kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 43g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 191mg | Sodium: 2150mg | Potassium: 821mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 56g | Vitamin A: 351IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 4mg

Southern-Style Green Beans

by 3 Comments

Southern-Style Green Beans are super tender and loaded with amazing flavor. This recipe hits all the right notes. Fresh string beans slowly simmered in savory chicken broth (or vegetable broth) with herbs and a little bacon grease. The perfect side dish for your holiday ham, roast turkey, or any Sunday dinner!

An overhead view of a pot of Southern-style green beans that have pieces of cooked bacon visible throughout and on top of the cooked beans.

🫛 The Ingredients

The simple, fresh ingredients, including fresh green beans, garlic, bacon, and savory seasonings, create a delicious side dish that perfectly complements any meal. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

The ingredients for Southern-style green beans arranged on a wooden background, including fresh green beans, garlic cloves, diced onions, bacon, and seasonings, all neatly organized for easy preparation.

🌿 Substitutions and Variations

  • Beans – We highly recommend using fresh green beans. Cut them to whatever length you desire, and snip the ends. Canned can be substituted, in a pinch. You’ll still have a nice flavor, just not as fresh. Simmering the fresh beans for at least an hour will give you very tender beans. If you prefer them not as tender, reduce the simmering time to 30 to 45 minutes.
  • Bacon – It adds a depth of taste and texture that is Southern. Prosciutto or pancetta are wonderful substitutions. For a vegetarian (and vegan) dish, omit the bacon and use vegetable broth.
  • Flavor enhancers – The fresh herbs are not overpowering, but deepen the flavor profile. Dried herbs can be used in place of fresh ones. Go with 1 teaspoon of dried. Thyme, oregano, or marjoram are all delicious options.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

Expert Tip

Your bacon will render grease, which is loaded with wonderful bacon flavor. However, you don’t want too much grease in your beans. You’ll want about 2 tablespoons, which means you’ll likely need to spoon out some of the grease. Save it for future cooking!

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make Southern-Style Green Beans

Chopped bacon cooking in a large Dutch oven with a wooden spatula stirring it.
  1. Step 1: Cook the chopped bacon in a large pot until crisp. 
Chopped onion being sautéed in oil in a large oval Dutch oven.
  1. Step 2: Sauté the onions, garlic, and red pepper flakes.
A person pouring chicken broth from a large glass measuring cup into a Dutch oven filled with fresh green beans.
  1. Step 3: Add the green beans, salt, pepper, thyme, bay leaf, and the broth.
Fresh green beans simmering in chicken broth in a large Dutch oven.
  1. Step 4: Simmer for 45 minutes to an hour.
Two pads of butter and a pile of chopped crispy bacon on top of a pot of Southern-style green beans.
  1. Step 5: Remove the herbs and stir in the butter.  
A white serving bowl filled with Southern-style green beans that have pieces of crispy bacon on top.
  1. Step 6: Serve at once, topped with extra bacon. 

🍽️ How To Serve

  • As mentioned, these beans can be prepared in advance and then reheated.
  • If serving at the table, we reheat the beans in a large pot and then transfer them to a serving vessel. It’s easier to pass this way.
  • We recommend waiting to stir in the butter and the cooked bacon until just before serving. The butter makes the beans very silky, and the bacon will stay crisp.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What are the best types of green beans for Southern-style green beans?

Fresh green beans, such as haricots verts or snap beans, are ideal for Southern-style green beans, as they provide a tender texture and vibrant flavor.

Can I make Southern-style green beans ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare Southern-style green beans in advance; simply cook them, let them cool, and store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days before reheating.

What dishes pair well with Southern-style green beans?

These are always a hit for any holiday feast. They also pair wonderfully with Southern fried chicken, Texas-style barbecue, homemade meatloaf, or any hearty main course.

🥦 Other Classic Southern Side Dish Recipes

Ready to make the best green beans this side of Atlanta? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A round pot filled with Southern-style green beans on a white and blue striped place setting.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Southern-Style Green Beans

Slowly simmered green beans with bacon, herbs, and a touch of butter take this side dish to the next level. And, they can be made in advance and then reheated before serving. Perfect for a special holiday feast, but also a Sunday dinner at home.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour
Total Time1 hour 15 minutes
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American Southern
Servings: 4
Calories: 220kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large pot with lid the size you would boil pasta in

Ingredients

  • 4 slices bacon thick-cut, cut into bite-sized pieces
  • 1 medium onion chopped, about 1 cup
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper more for extra heat
  • 1½ lbs green beans fresh, trimmed and halved
  • 2½ cups chicken broth plus extra, as needed
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 3 sprigs thyme fresh
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 2 tablespoon butter unsalted

Instructions

  • Cook the bacon in a large pot (or Dutch oven) over medium heat until crispy. Use a slotted spoon to remove the bacon onto a plate lined with paper towels. Spoon out enough of the rendered bacon grease to leave about 2 tablespoons.
    4 slices bacon
  • Add the onions to the pot and sauté in the bacon grease until soft and translucent, about 4 to 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and red pepper flakes, sauté for another 30 seconds.
    1 medium onion, 3 cloves garlic, ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper
  • Add the green beans, broth, salt, pepper, thyme, and bay leaf. Bring to a boil and then lower the heat to low and cover the pot. Simmer the beans until they are very tender, about 45 minutes to 1 hour.
    1½ lbs green beans, 2½ cups chicken broth, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 3 sprigs thyme, 1 bay leaf
  • Use tongs to remove the thyme sprigs and bay leaf from the pot. Stir in the butter and cooked bacon. Serve at once.
    2 tablespoon butter

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
The beans can be trimmed up to 48 hours in advance of cooking them. (Do this ahead of time; it will save you time when you’re ready to start cooking). 
The beans can be simmered several hours in advance of serving. Don’t stir in the butter and bacon until ready to serve. Reheat the beans over medium heat. 
Leftovers are delicious and can be kept in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Reheat on the stove over medium heat. 

Nutrition

Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 1912mg | Potassium: 494mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1437IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 2mg

Homemade Christmas Cookies

by 1 Comment

Christmas is a time of joy and these festive cookies perfectly fit the bill.

These cookies are simple sugar cookies (without the sugar topping), but their flavor is so satisfying and they check all the right boxes for cookie lovers. The royal icing isn’t difficult to make and truly puts them into a class all of their own. They are just begging for a cold glass of milk! Santa will be so happy!

An overhead view of a collection of colorful homemade Christmas cookies that in the shape of bells, ornaments, tress, snowmen, and bells.

How to Make Homemade Christmas Cookies

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

There are just a hand-full of ingredients for these cookies, so quality is important. For the tools, you can find most of them at your local craft merchant, kitchen gadget store, or online.

The Tools

Rolling Pin – We love our marble rolling pin.
Parchment paper – Or silicon mats, which is what we recommend.
Baking sheet – You’ll need two. Or, you’ll need to bake the cookies in batches.
Christmas cookie cutters – Found at most craft stores, or online.
Thin icing spreader – An offset spatula works well. But, a coffee stirrer works wonderfully, too!
Icing bottles – Found at baking supply stores or online.

The Ingredients for the Cookies

Butter – Unsalted, room temperature.
Sugar – Granulated.
Vanilla extract – Or almond extract. Go with good quality.
Egg – Large.
Flour – All-purpose.
Salt – Table salt works best.
Baking powder – Check the expiration date.

The Ingredients for the Royal Icing

Powdered sugar – Also known as Confectioners’.
Warm – Warm tap water if fine, or heat it in the microwave.
Meringue powder – Found at some craft stores, baking supply stores, or online.
Color gels – Found at some craft stores, baking supply stores, or online.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to chill the dough before rolling it and cutting it. If the dough is too warm, the cookies will easily become misshapen.

A person pressing a cookie cutter in the shape of a Christmas tree into rolled out sugar cookie dough.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Christmas Cookies

Chill the Dough – After preparing your sugar cookie dough, chill it in the refrigerator for at least 1-2 hours (or overnight) before rolling it out. Chilling helps the dough firm up, making it easier to cut out shapes and preventing the cookies from spreading too much while baking.

Use a Reliable Royal Icing Recipe – For decorating, use our royal icing recipe that includes egg whites or meringue powder for stability. This will ensure your icing dries hard and holds its shape, allowing for detailed designs. Adjust the consistency by adding water for flooding or powdered sugar for piping. See NOTES for a recipe with egg whites.

Outline and Flood Technique – Start by outlining your cookies with a thicker consistency of royal icing using a piping bag. Once the outline is set, use a thinner icing to flood the center of the cookie, using a coffee stirrer or toothpick to spread the icing evenly and eliminate air bubbles for a smooth finish.

Let Icing Dry Completely – Allow your decorated cookies to dry completely before stacking or packaging them. This can take several hours or even overnight, depending on humidity. To speed up the process, place the cookies in a cool, dry area to help the icing set firmly without smudging.

EXPERT TIP: You’ll need to mix the royal icing mixture until it is thick enough that a ribbon will appear across the surface when you drag a spoon over it. This takes about 6 yo 7 minutes of mixing.

An overhead view of a person using a hand mixer to thicken white royal icing in a large stainless steel bowl.

How To Store

It’s important to allow the iced cookies to completely dry before serving them. The icing will be fully set after a couple of hours.

Store cooled cookies in an airtight container for 1 to 2 weeks.

These sugar cookies with royal icing will stay fresh without needing to be refrigerated. The meringue powder in the icing is key to keeping the cookies fresh.

A person using a thin wooden stick to spread green royal icing across the surface of a Christmas tree-shaped sugar cookie.

Other Holiday Dessert Recipes to Try

There is so much to love about the holidays and these delectable desserts are right up near the top of the list!

These are all guaranteed to get you into the holiday spirit, without a doubt. But, in the meantime, aren’t these cookies calling your name?

An overhead view of a box that is lined with brown wax paper and is filled with colorful homemade Christmas cookies.

Nothing spells the holiday season much more than these festive Christmas cookies.

Not only are they a hit with kids and adults, they make wonderful gifts, too.

The recipe can easily be doubled to make an extra large batch. Make these delicious cookies and spread the Christmas joy.

Merry Christmas!

A straight-on view of a white dessert plate filled with a pile of colorful homemade Christmas cookies next to a glass of milk and a small sign that reads: For Santa.

Ready to make the best cookies this side of the North Pole? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a white plate filled with a collection of colorful homemade Christmas cookies.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Homemade Christmas Cookies

These sugar cookies are easy to make and are the perfect sweet treat for the holiday season. Be sure to let the royal icing completely set before serving. These cookies will stay fresh for 2 to 3 weeks.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time14 minutes
Icing and Resting Time3 hours
Total Time3 hours 29 minutes
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 486kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 sticks unsalted butter room temperature, 8 oz
  • ⅔ cup sugar
  • 1½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 large egg
  • 2½ cup all-purpose flour
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon baking powder

For the Royal Icing

  • 4 cups confectioners' sugar
  • 3 tablespoon meringue powder
  • ½ cup hot water
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Beat the butter with the sugar in a stand mixer with the paddle attachment (or with a hand mixer) until light and creamy, about 4 to 5 minutes.
    2 sticks unsalted butter, ⅔ cup sugar
  • Beat in the vanilla and then the egg.
    1½ teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 large egg
  • With the mixer on medium-low, slowly add the flour, salt, and baking powder. Beat until fully mixed.
    2½ cup all-purpose flour, ½ teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon baking powder
  • Remove the dough and smooth it into a ball with your hands. Divide the dough into three discs, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate for 30 minutes (or up to overnight).
  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Working 1 portion at a time, roll the dough out on a lightly floured surface to about ¼ to ½-inch thickness. Cut the cookies with the cutters. Gather the scraps and reroll to cut more cookies. Place the cookies on two sheet pans lined with a silicone mat or parchment paper. Bake until the edges are just starting to turn a light brown, about 13 to 15 minutes.
  • Allow the cookies to cool completely before icing them.

Make the Royal Icing

  • In a large bowl, add the confectioners' sugar, meringue powder, hot water, and vanilla extract.
    4 cups confectioners' sugar, 3 tablespoon meringue powder, ½ cup hot water, ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Use an electric mixer on medium speed and beat until thick, about 7 minutes. You'll know it's ready when you can drag a spoon across the top of the icing and a ribbon remains on the surface.
  • Divide the icing and stir in desired food coloring gels. Ice cookies with a small spatula, coffee stirrer, or toothpick. Decorate with icing bottles.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Bake the cookies until the edges are just starting to brown. Depending on your oven, this can take anywhere between 10 and 16 minutes. Keep an eye on them and switch the pans in the oven about halfway through baking. Be sure to allow the cookies to completely cool before icing them.
It takes at least a couple of hours for the royal icing to fully set and become hard. 
The cookies will stay fresh in an air-tight container for 2 to 3 weeks, but, are best served within a few days of baking them. 

Nutrition

Calories: 486kcal | Carbohydrates: 107g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 84mg | Sodium: 160mg | Potassium: 73mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 76g | Vitamin A: 740IU | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 2mg

Cheesy Skillet Rolls (Pull-Apart Bread Wreath)

by 2 Comments

These rolls are nothing short of sublime. The smell, as they are baking, is intoxicating.

Then once you pull that first warm and cheesy roll out of the skillet and take a bite…you will be transported to a place that dreams are made of. They are wonderful all year round, but, they are especially festive during the holiday season. We place an oven-safe ramekin in the middle, and then serve the ‘wreath’ with our homemade marinara sauce!

An overhead view a bread wreath with a ramekin in the center filled with marinara sauce and is surround by festive herbs.

How To Make Cheesy Skillet Rolls

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

We love to make these rolls in a cast-iron skillet. Depending on the size of the dough balls you form, you can use a 9-inch skillet (or baking pan) or up to a 12-inch skillet. If you’re making the holiday bread wreath, you’ll need a small oven-proof ramekin to place inverted in the center of the rolls.

For the ingredients, here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Flour – All-purpose.
Yeast – Either ‘active’ or ‘instant’ will work. Check the expiration date! Very important!
Salt – Table salt is best (not coarse salt).
Sugar – Granulated.
Water – Warm in the microwave until 120°F to 125°F, or go with warm tap water.
Oil – Olive oil, or extra virgin olive oil is best.
Mozzarella – Fresh is definitely your best option. You can also find small mozzarella balls called “Ciliegine” or “pearls” usually located in the specialty cheese section of your supermarket.
Butter – Unsalted.
Parsley – Fresh, chopped
Seasonings – Dried oregano, basil, and garlic powder.
Parmesan – Grated.

EXPERT TIP: After the dough has nearly doubled in size after the first round of proofing, you’ll want to form the dough balls. They should be slightly larger than a golf ball. After you place them in the greased pan, you’ll want them to proof for at least another 30 minutes.

roll dough in a hand over a skillet of other rolled rolls for cheesy skillet rolls

Tips for Making Perfect Cheesy Skillet Rolls

Use Fresh Ingredients – Opt for high-quality, fresh mozzarella to ensure a gooey, melty center. Additionally, using fresh herbs like parsley or basil in the topping enhances the flavor and aroma of the rolls.

Knead the Dough Properly – Make sure to knead the dough (with your stand mixer or by hand) until it’s smooth and elastic, which helps develop the gluten structure. This will give your rolls a light and airy texture. Allow the dough to rise until it has doubled in size for the best results.

Stuff Generously – When forming the rolls, make sure to stuff them generously with mozzarella, but not so much that they burst. Pinch the dough tightly around the cheese to seal in the filling and prevent it from leaking during baking.

Brush with Butter, Cheese, and Herbs – Before baking, you’ll want to brush the tops of the rolls with melted butter. Then for the last five minutes, brush on more butter with a sprinkle of chopped mozzarella and grated Parmesan. Once it’s out of the oven, brush on melted butter mixed with herbs and Parmesan cheese.

Freshly baked cheesy skillet rolls in a cast iron skillet

How To Serve

You have options on how you want to serve this pull-apart bread. If making a holiday wreath, then you can bake it in a cast-iron skillet or a 9-inch cake pan with a small ramekin in the middle.

Or, you could place parchment paper on a baking sheet with a ramekin in the middle. Form the dough balls and place them around the ramekin on the parchment paper in the shape of a wreath.

If you bake in the skillet or pan, you have the option of removing the ramekin and then carefully removing the baked rolls from the pan to place on a serving platter. If the bread pulls apart a bit during this process, don’t fret. Just place them back together and no one will even notice.

And remember to serve this with homemade marinara or ranch dressing for a wonderful dipping sauce.

These rolls are so good, that they can be served as an appetizer or with the main course. Get ready, they must just steal the show!

Cheesy skillet rolls in the background in a cast iron skillet with a single roll on a plate in front

Other Awesome Baked Bread Recipes To Try

There’s nothing better than the smell of homemade bread baking in the oven. Here is a collection of some of our favorites that we are certain will be an instant classic in your home.

These are all absolutely amazing and comforting. But, in the meantime, aren’t these rolls calling your name?

A person pulling apart a cheesy skillet rolls with two hands revealing a melty cheese pull with a bowl of marinara in the background.

These rolls are spectacular for any occasion. They make a wonderful appetizer or with a main course.

During the holiday season, turning them into a festive wreath is as gorgeous as it is delicious. Be sure to serve with homemade marinara sauce!

Nothing is much more comforting than pillowy, fluffy, delicious homemade rolls. And these are easy to make and always a huge hit.

A straight-on view of two homemade cheesy skillet rolls that are sitting on a small white plate with the loaf of rolls in the background.

Ready to make the best cheesy dinner rolls in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view a bread wreath with a ramekin in the center filled with marinara sauce and is surround by festive herbs.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Cheesy Skillet Rolls

Cheesy Skillet Rolls are amazing.  The smell is intoxicating and the melty, cheesy, garlicky yumminess of these freshly made rolls is something your loved ones will be talking about for days to come.  You won't believe how easy they are to make! Perfect any time of the year, but especially wonderful during the holiday season!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time25 minutes
Proofing time2 hours
Total Time2 hours 45 minutes
Course: Bread
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 540kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 9-inch cast-iron skillet or cake pan or 12-inch skillet for smaller rolls.

Ingredients

  • 4 cups all-purpose flour
  • 2¼ teaspoon instant yeast
  • 2½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1½ teaspoon granulated sugar
  • 1¼ cups warm water (120°F to 125°F)
  • ⅓ cup olive oil
  • Cooking spray
  • 12 oz. fresh mozzarella cut into small cubes or balls, plus extra chopped
  • 6 tablespoon unsalted butter divided
  • 3 tablespoon Parmesan cheese grated, divided
  • 1 tablespoon Italian parsley fresh, chopped
  • ½ teaspoon oregano dried
  • ½ teaspoon basil
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 cup marinara sauce for serving (optional)
  • fresh herbs for garnishing the wreath, ie, rosemary, sage, bay leaves.

Instructions

  • In the bowl of a stand mixer with the dough hook attached, mix the flour, yeast, salt, and sugar.  With the mixer on low speed, gradually add the warm water and the oil and continue beating until combined.
    4 cups all-purpose flour, 2¼ teaspoon instant yeast, 2½ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1½ teaspoon granulated sugar, 1¼ cups warm water, ⅓ cup olive oil
  • Increase mixer speed to medium, and beat until smooth and elastic, about 7 minutes. If too dry, add small drops of water until smooth.
  • Spray a large bowl with cooking spray and place dough in it, turning the dough to coat it with the oil. Cover with plastic wrap, and let rise in a warm, draft-free place (about 75°F) until doubled in size, about 1 hour to 90 minutes (but could be longer).
    Cooking spray
  • Spray a 9 to 10-inch cast iron skillet, or 9-inch baking pan, with cooking spray. 
  • If making a bread wreath, spray the sides of a small oven-proof ramekin with cooking spray. Place the ramekin upside down in the middle of the prepared skillet or pan.
  • On a lightly floured surface, turn the dough out of the bowl. Knead for about 30 seconds with the heels of your hands. Pinch off a piece of dough, about 2 ounces. Flatten and place a cubed piece of mozzarella in the center. Form the dough around the cheese and form it into a smooth ball, slightly larger than a golf ball. (Be sure to leave about ½ cup of mozzarella to add to the top of the rolls).
    12 oz. fresh mozzarella
  • Place the dough round in the skillet or pan, seam side down. Continue this process until the skillet is full and all of the dough has been used. Place smaller pinches of mozzarella between rolls, filling any holes (about ¼ cup of the mozzarella, you'll use the rest during the baking process). Cover the rolls with a kitchen towel and then return them to a warm, non-drafty area. Allow to proof for 30 minutes to an hour.
  • Preheat oven to 400°F. (If proofing the rolls in your unheated oven, remove them before preheating).
  • Melt 1 tablespoon of the butter and brush over the top of the rolls.
    6 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Bake for 20 minutes. Remove from oven and brush another 1 tablespoon butter (melted) over the top. Sprinkle 1 tablespoon of grated Parmesan cheese and the remaining chopped mozzarella (about 2 to 3 tbsp) over the top. Bake for another 5 minutes.
    3 tablespoon Parmesan cheese
  • In a small bowl, melt the remaining 4 tablespoon butter, and then stir in the parsley, oregano, basil, garlic powder, and 2 tablespoon Parmesan cheese.  
    1 tablespoon Italian parsley, ½ teaspoon oregano, ½ teaspoon basil, 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • Brush rolls with butter mixture and then serve immediately. If serving as a wreath, carefully remove the ramekin and then use spatulas to remove the rolls from the skillet or pan. Fill the ramekin with marinara sauce and place in the middle of the rolls. Garnish with fresh herbs, if desired.
    1 cup marinara sauce, fresh herbs

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
This recipe can be made in a large skillet, dish, or pan. Form smaller balls of dough and be sure to allow the dough to proof a second time, for at least 30 minutes, but preferably 1 hour to 90 minutes. 
This dough makes excellent dinner rolls. Just omit the mozzarella cheese. You can add the butter/herb/cheese topping, or, just top with melted butter. Cook time is about the same. Keep an eye on them, once the tops are slightly browned, they are ready. 
Leftover rolls will keep covered for several days. Reheat in the microwave. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1roll | Calories: 540kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 648mg | Potassium: 236mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 742IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 258mg | Iron: 4mg

POST UPDATE: This was originally published in June 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips, photography, and a fabulous new video in December 2024!

Best Breakfast Casserole

by 4 Comments

Many say breakfast is the most important meal of the day. With this casserole, it’s also the most delicious!

We are big fans of breakfast and we are big fans of casseroles, so, we were determined to come up with the best of both worlds. You could use homemade hash browns, but, we find that thawed frozen hash browns do the trick, and make preparing the dish so much easier. Perfect for serving a hungry gathering, especially during the holiday season!

A straight-on view of a 9-inch by 13-inch white casserole dish that is filled with the best breakfast casserole with a portion of it missing and revealing the filling of the dish.

How To Make The Best Breakfast Casserole

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients in this casserole can be tweaked to suit your family’s tastes. Feel free to change up the veggies! Spice it up with jalapeños, if desired. For our version, here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Cooking Spray – Our softened butter, for greasing a 9×13″ baking dish.
Pork breakfast sausage – We like ‘hot’ breakfast sausage, but regular is delicious (and has no spice to it).
Onion – Chopped.
Bell pepper – Seeded and chopped. Our preference is red, but you go with your favorite. Green, yellow, red, or a combination. Or, just leave it out!
Green chilis – Canned. These can be found in the Hispanic section of most well-stocked supermarkets.
Eggs – You’ll need 12 of them. This feeds a hungry household!
Half and half – Whole milk can be substituted for the half and half.
Seasonings – Salt, pepper, garlic powder.
Frozen hash browns – Thawed. This can be easily done by defrosting in your microwave.
Shredded cheese – Cheddar, Monterey Jack, and Colby are all great options, or a combination of them!
Scallions – Thinly sliced, for garnish. Optional

EXPERT TIP: Simply add the peppers and onion into the skillet along with the uncooked sausage and then cook until the sausage is no longer pink. The sausage will render some grease during the cooking process which perfectly sautés the vegetables. If there is excess grease, tilt the skillet to the side and spoon it out.

A close-up view of a large black non-stick skillet filled with cooked breakfast sausage with chopped red bell peppers and onion and a wooden spatula inserted in the middle of it.

Tips for Making the Best Breakfast Casserole

Cook the Sausage with the Veggies – Brown the breakfast sausage with your favorite vegetables before adding it to the casserole. This infuses the vegetables with the sausage flavor and allows you to spoon out excess rendered grease before adding to the egg and cream mixture.

Use Frozen Hash Browns – Opt for frozen hash browns for convenience and texture. They provide a crispy base when baked and save you the hassle of grating fresh potatoes. Just make sure to thaw them slightly and toss them with salt and pepper before adding to the dish.

Layer Ingredients – For an even distribution of flavors, layer the ingredients in the casserole dish. Start with a layer of hash browns, followed by the egg and sausage mixture, and then the cheese on the top. This ensures that every bite is flavorful and well-balanced.

Let it Rest – Allow the assembled casserole to rest for at least 15-30 minutes before baking. This resting period helps the flavors meld together and allows the hash browns to absorb some of the egg mixture, resulting in a more cohesive and delicious dish.

EXPERT TIP: You’ll need to let the cooked sausage and vegetables mixture cool somewhat before adding to the eggs and cream mixture. If you add them while they are still very hot, it will start to cook the eggs, which will lead to uneven baking.

A person dumping cooked sausage and peppers from a skillet into a large glass bowl filled with an egg and cream mixture.

How To Serve

As mentioned, this is a large casserole and can easily feed 8 to 10 people, depending on how hungry they are and what else you are serving.

Leftovers are delicious and heat up nicely. However, if you prefer, you can cut the recipe in half for a smaller serving.

We love to serve this during the holidays for a nice brunch and include maple pepper bacon and homemade monkey bread.

EXPERT TIP: Take care when pouring the egg and sausage mixture over the hash browns. Use a wooden spatula or spoon to help distribute the mixture evenly over the potatoes. Top with the cheese and then press the cheese into the egg mixture gently with clean hands.

A straight-on view of a person pouring an egg and cream mixture with sausage into a baking dish that is lined with uncooked frozen hashbrowns.

Other Breakfast Recipes That Are Perfect for the Holidays

Here is a collection of breakfast recipes, some savory and some sweet. They are wonderful any time of the year, but, they really bring extra cheer when served during the holiday season!

These are all so good and always a hit with loved ones. But, in the meantime, isn’t this casserole calling your name?

An overhead view of best breakfast casserole in a rectangular white baking dish resting on a colorful place matt next to a glass and carafe of orange juice.

There is just something so comforting about a casserole. And when it’s a breakfast casserole, it’s even better.

Assemble this incredible dish the night before, and all that’s needed is to stick it in the oven the next morning.

The casserole is so delicious, we have no problem heating leftovers up and having them for lunch and/or dinner. It’s really that good!

A straight-on view of square piece of a breakfast casserole with a top layer of melty cheese over sausage sitting on a bed of shredded potatoes.

Ready to make the best breakfast dish in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of square piece of a breakfast casserole with a top layer of melty cheese over sausage sitting on a bed of shredded potatoes.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Best Breakfast Casserole

Everyone loves a good casserole and when you serve on for breakfast, it's even better! Be sure to allow the hash browns to thaw first. This can be expedited by defrosting them in your microwave. Letting the casserole rest for 15 to 20 minutes is important. This allows the liquid to be absorbed by the potatoes. If you cut into it too soon, there may be a little extra liquid at the bottom of the dish.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour
Resting time20 minutes
Total Time1 hour 35 minutes
Course: Breakfast / Brunch
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 487kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 9"x13" baking dish

Ingredients

  • cooking spray
  • 1 lb breakfast sausage regular or hot (spicy)
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 12 large eggs
  • 2 cups half and half
  • 1 4 oz can green chilis chopped
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper divided
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 30 oz frozen hash browns thawed
  • 2 cups cheddar cheese shredded
  • 3 scallions sliced, white and green parts, for garnish

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Spray a 9x13" baking dish with cooking spray until coated.
    cooking spray
  • Crumble the sausage into a large skillet over medium heat. Stir in the onion and bell pepper and cook, stirring often, until the sausage is no longer pink and the vegetables are soft. Set aside to cool for about 15 minutes.
    1 lb breakfast sausage, 1 medium onion, 1 red bell pepper
  • Crack the eggs into a large bowl and whisk until lightly beaten. Stir in the half and half, green chilis, 1 teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, and the garlic powder. Gently stir in the cooled sausage mixture.
    12 large eggs, 2 cups half and half, 1 4 oz can green chilis, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • In another large bowl, toss the thawed hash browns with 1 teaspoon salt and ½ teaspoon pepper. Press the seasoned hash brown into the bottom of the prepared dish.
    30 oz frozen hash browns
  • Pour the egg and sausage mixture over the tops of the hash browns. Use a large spatula to evenly spread the mixture over the hash browns. Top with the shredded cheese.
    2 cups cheddar cheese
  • Bake for 45 minutes, until the eggs are set and the top is lightly browned.
  • Remove from the oven and allow the casserole to rest for 15 to 20 minutes. Garnish with scallions. Slice and serve at once.
    3 scallions

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The hash browns are easier to toss with the salt and pepper when they are thawed. You can easily defrost them in you microwave. 
The casserole can be assembled entirely the evening before. Cover the dish and place in the refrigerator. Remove from the fridge an hour before baking. And be sure to remove the foil. 
You may experience a small amount of liquid in the bottom of the dish when you remove slices. This is moisture from the hash browns. Allowing the casserole to rest for 15 to 20 minutes will help reduce this if not completely eliminate any extra liquid. Use a paper towel to absorb the excess liquid (there shouldn't be much). 
Leftovers will keep in the fridge (with foil over the dish or in a container with a lid) for up to 5 days. Reheat in a 325°F oven (covered with foil) for 20 minutes, or until heated through. Or, heat in the microwave on HIGH for 1-minute increments. 

Nutrition

Calories: 487kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 27g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 369mg | Sodium: 898mg | Potassium: 418mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1457IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 321mg | Iron: 2mg

Bourbon Orange Glazed Ham (Holiday Ham)

by 1 Comment

We can’t rave enough about this incredible Mangalitsa ham. If you are looking for something extra special for your holiday feast, you will definitely want to consider this exquisite ham with our Bourbon Orange Glaze Ham (Holiday Ham). Perfect when served with Potatoes Dauphinoise and Maple Glazed Carrots.

A smoked bone-in ham that is sitting on a white platter and has been cut into slices.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍯 The Ingredients

The ingredients for this dish are simple yet work together to create a luxurious taste that beautifully complements the richness of the pork.

Using Mangalitsa Smoked Ham from Mangalitsa Estates guarantees a delectable flavor and tenderness, elevating this dish to an unforgettable culinary experience.

Use Discount Code: LOON15 for 15% off!

An organized display of ingredients for holiday glazed ham, featuring a bottle of bourbon, a jar of orange marmalade, a container of coarse mustard, and a bottle of maple syrup, all artfully arranged on a light background.

🥃 Substitutions and Variations

  • Ham – we recommend a bone-in smoked ham. For a smaller ham, go with a boneless ham (about 5 to 7 lbs). For a holiday feast, we recommend investing in a higher-quality ham than you might find at your local supermarket. But, even if you do, this recipe and technique will deliver a delicious ham.
  • Bourbon – If you would rather not cook with alcohol, simply omit it. If you’re wondering what’s the best bourbon to make the glaze with, we recommend Knobb Creek, TX Whiskey, or Woodford Reserve. It imparts amazing flavor, so you don’t want to go with the cheap brands.
  • Flavor Enhancers – Make sure the maple syrup is 100% pure. Seek out a quality orange marmalade. And fresh lemon juice is always best. Coarse-grain mustard adds amazing depth of flavor.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

How To Make Bourbon Orange Glazed Ham

A person using a whisk to combine a glaze of bourbon, orange marmalade, mustard, and maple syrup.
  1. Step 1: In a bowl, mix together the glaze ingredients.
A person brushing a bourbon orange glaze over the exterior of a smoked ham that is resting on a roasting rack in a roasting pan.
  1. Step 2: Brush the glaze all over the ham. 
A person lifting a roasting pan that has a foil-covered ham in it.
  1. Step 3: Loosely tent the ham with foil and bake for 90 minutes. 
A person brushing on bourbon orange glaze onto a partially baked smoked ham.
  1. Step 4: Remove the foil, add more glaze, and continue roasting the ham.
A holiday ham that has been baked with a glaze on it resting in the roasting pan.
  1. Step 5: Remove the ham from the oven and let it rest for 20 minutes. 
A person using a carving fork and knife to slice into a bourbon orange glazed ham on a white platter.
  1. Step 6: Slice the ham, place on a platter, and serve. 

Expert Tip

As you are applying the first round of glaze to the ham, you’ll want to use about ½ cup. Be sure to save enough glaze to brush ample more on a couple more times at the end of the roasting process.

🍽️ How To Serve

  • This ham is delicious served warm or at room temperature. To reheat, cover the sliced ham tightly with foil and heat in a low-temperature oven (325°F) until the slices are warm (usually about 30 minutes, depending on how thick the slices are).
  • We like to save some of the bourbon orange glaze to pass at the table. However, remember that most of the alcohol will cook out during the cooking process. The glaze passed tableside will still have alcohol from the bourbon.
  • Apply the glaze before roasting (with foil tent) and then again during the last 15 to 20 minutes of cooking to prevent burning. Baste the ham at least twice for a beautiful, sticky coating that caramelizes perfectly while keeping the meat moist. Keep an eye on it, don’t let it burn!

🙌 Why Serve Mangalitsa Ham?

  • Mangalista pork has characteristics similar to those of Kobe beef. It’s highly marbled and when heated through, that marbleization becomes melt-in-your-mouth delicious.
  • Mangalitsa pigs with Mangalitsa Estates are fed an all-natural vegetarian diet with no antibiotics. These hogs are developed in loose housing and fed a Wheat or Barley diet for the last 60 days or so.
  • Their commitment to the humane treatment of animals is a high priority. Mangalitsa Estates is a family-run farm that has been serving chefs, and now home cooks, for generations.
  • You will spend more money to get this level of quality. But for special times, such as Christmas, Easter, or even New Year’s Eve, it couldn’t be a better roast to serve.
  • Other amazing Mangalitsa pork recipes include Pork Chop Agrodolce with Mushrooms and Smoked Pork Wings.

🙋🏽‍♂️Frequently Asked Questions

Can a Smoked Ham Be Heated in a Slow-cooker?

For this recipe, you’ll get the best results in your oven. However, for smaller, boneless hams, you may want to consider our Slow-Cooker Spiral Ham.

How far in advance do I need to order my Mangalitsa ham?

Give yourself a couple of weeks, just to be certain. The ham comes pristinely packaged and will keep in the fridge for over a week, or can be frozen for up to several months. Remember to use the discount code LOON15 to receive a 15% discount when ordering!

What can I do with leftover ham?

First, and foremost, save the ham bone so you can make New Orleans red beans and rice. We also love to make a classic ham loaf and an authentic Kentucky brown. Or, get ready for the best ham sandwiches you’ll ever experience!

A white dinner plate with a serving of sliced smoked ham, mashed potatoe, and cheesy broccoli on it, with a glass of white wine and a platter of the sliced ham nearby.

😋 What To Serve with the Ham

Although this ham will be the undisputed star of your holiday feast, don’t forget about side dishes that will also elevate your dinner to wonderful culinary heights.

Ready to make the best holiday ham in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a half smoked bourbon glazed ham resting on a large white platter with numerous slices cut from the roast on stacked also on the platter.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Bourbon Orange Glazed Ham (Holiday Ham)

This smoked ham is the perfect centerpiece for your holiday feast. The bourbon adds a depth of flavor that is amazing and the sweetness of the marmalade and maple syrup is the perfect match to the succulent ham. For the best ham available, go with a Mangalitsa ham (see NOTES).
Prep Time10 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 50 minutes
Resting time14 minutes
Total Time2 hours 14 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 12
Calories: 314kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Large roasting pan. with roasting rack (optional)
  • aluminum foil for tenting the ham during roasting
  • Brush for applying the glaze

Ingredients

  • ⅔ cup orange marmalade
  • ¼ cup Bourbon or dark rum
  • 3 tablespoon pure maple syrup
  • 3 tablespoon coarse-ground mustard or Dijon
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper ground
  • 1 7 to 9 lb half ham bone-in, smoked

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 325°F.
  • In a medium bowl, mix the marmalade, Bourbon, maple syrup, mustard, lemon juice, salt, and pepper.
    ⅔ cup orange marmalade, ¼ cup Bourbon, 3 tablespoon pure maple syrup, 3 tablespoon coarse-ground mustard, 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Brush the ham all over with about ½ cup of the glaze. Place the ham in the roasting pan (or on a rimmed baking sheet) and loosely cover the ham with foil. Place the pan on a grate in the lower third of your oven for 90 minutes.
    1 7 to 9 lb half ham
  • Remove the ham from the oven and increase the temperature to 425°F. Gently peel the foil away from the roast. Meanwhile, brush on another ½ cup of the glaze over the ham. Return the ham to the oven for about 5 to 8 minutes. Remove the ham again, apply one more liberal layer of the glaze, and roast for another 5 minutes. Keep an eye on the roast, don't let the glaze burn!
  • Remove the ham and let rest for 15 to 20 minutes. Place on a platter (or cutting board), slice, and serve at once.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
Mangalitsa pork can easily be ordered from Mangalista Estates. Use Discount Code: LOON25 for 25% off! You can go with a bone-in or boneless ham with this recipe. If going with boneless, then only roast the ham for 60 minutes and then glaze again for another 10 to 15 minutes (glazing twice).
Though this ham is delicious when served at room temperature, it’s amazing when served warm. The marbling becomes melt-in-your-mouth delicious. 
Leftovers will keep (covered) in the fridge for up to a week. Sliced ham can be frozen for up to several months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 314kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 110mg | Sodium: 667mg | Potassium: 25mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 14IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 16mg

Spanish Chicken and Rice (Arroz con Pollo)

by 8 Comments

You will flip for this dish if you love a good one-pot wonder dish as much as we do.

There are many variations of this chicken and rice dish, but we think the Spanish flavors and ingredients put this dish in a class all of its own. It’s great for a weeknight dinner, but beautiful (and delicious) enough to serve to guests. Our Spanish garlic shrimp (Gambas al Ajillo) would be the perfect appetizer!

An overhead view of a large stainless steel skillet filled with Spanish chicken and rice with the seared chicken thighs resting in colorful rice along with slices of chorizo and green olives.

How To Make Spanish Chicken and Rice (Arroz con Pollo)

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube Channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Most of the ingredients in this dish are easy to find at your local supermarket. You can omit, or add, any of the ingredients, based on your likes. For this recipe, here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Chicken – We recommend bone-in, skin-on chicken pieces. We find thighs work wonderfully. However, you can also go with boneless chicken breasts, or even shredded (or cubed) chicken from a rotisserie.
Seasonings – Salt, pepper, smoked paprika, oregano, bay leaves, and saffron (optional).
Oil – Olive oil is best. Vegetable or canola oil can be substituted.
Onion – Chopped.
Garlic – Minced.
Chorizo – Cured Spanish-style is wonderful. It’s already cooked and all you need to do is brown it in the skillet. If you can’t find it, you can go with fresh chorizo, you’ll just need to cook it first in the skillet.
Rice – Short-grain or long-grain rice works perfectly. Or, go with traditional Spanish medium-grain paella rice. This can be found in many markets, including Whole Foods, or online.
White wine – We recommend Portuguese Maderia fortified wine. Or, any good dry white wine, such as Chardonnay or Sauvignon Blanc. If you don’t want to cook with alcohol, simply omit it. The flavor will still be wonderful.
Tomatoes – Canned chopped (or diced) work well. You can go with canned whole tomatoes, too. Crush them with your hands before adding them to the skillet. Or, use very ripe, red tomatoes, chopped – you’ll need about a cup and a half.
Roasted red peppers – The jarred variety is perfectly fine. You could also substitute pimentos for an authentic taste.
Green olives – Pitted.
Parsley – Fresh, Italian is best. Chopped and for garnish (optional).

EXPERT TIP: When searing the chicken, move the pieces around in the oil every little bit, this will help keep the skin from sticking to the skillet. Sear until the skin is brown and crispy.

A straight-on view of five skin-on, bone-in chicken thighs that have been seared in a large skillet in olive oil and the skin visible and is browned and crispy.

Tips for Making Perfect Spanish Chicken and Rice

Searing the Chicken is Critical – Start by searing the chicken pieces skin-side down in a hot pan until they are golden brown and crispy. This step enhances the flavor and texture of the chicken, while also rendering some fat that will enrich the rice.

Use Authentic Spices – Incorporate traditional Spanish spices like smoked paprika, saffron, and oregano to infuse the dish with rich flavors. These spices will give the rice its vibrant color and distinctive taste.

Layer the Flavors – After removing the chicken, sauté onions, garlic, and sausage in the same pan to build a flavor base before adding the rice and broth. This layering technique ensures that every bite is packed with flavor.

Cook Covered – Once you add the rice and broth, cover the pan and cook on low heat to allow the rice to absorb the flavors and steam properly. Avoid lifting the lid during cooking, as this will release steam and affect the texture of the rice.

EXPERT TIP: If you are going with skin-on chicken pieces (recommended), you will have some rendered grease in your pan, also some from the chorizo, too. You’ll probably want to remove all but about 2 tablespoon before you add the rice. If not, the dish may taste a bit too greasy.

A straight-on view of a wooden spatula being used to stir and sauté chopped onions and slices of Spanish chorizo in a large stainless skillet with olive oil.

How To Serve

This dish is very filling and is the perfect one-pot wonder.

We bring the skillet right to the table and let guests help themselves. However, it’s also beautiful to plate each serving individually before serving.

Warm dinner rolls or crusty bread is the perfect accompaniment to the comforting dish.

EXPERT TIP: When cooking the chicken and rice in the oven (with the lid on), you’ll want to give the rice a stir after about 20 minutes. We remove the chicken onto a platter (or cutting board) to make this process easier. Then place the chicken back into the rice. Before cooking in the oven, the chicken will nestle into the broth, but the rice will absorb most of the liquid.

A person using a pair of metal tongs to turn a seared skin-on chicken thigh in a large skillet will with a simmering red sauce along with other seared chicken thighs.

Other Amazing One-Pot Wonder Recipes to Try

One of the best things about a one-pot dish is the minimal cleanup that’s required. That’s great. But, the dish has to be delicious, as well. Here is a collection of recipes that check both of those boxes:

These are all amazing in their own right, but, in the meantime, isn’t this dish calling your name?

A close-up view of Spanish chicken and rice in a skillet with strips of roasted bell peppers and green olives scattered around the chicken in the rice.

This chicken and rice one-pot wonder has become a staple in our household.

We feel pretty certain that once you serve this to your loved ones, you’ll feel the same way.

And leftovers (if there are any) are equally delicious! So flavorful and easy clean up. What could be better than that?

A close-up view of a serving of Spanish chicken and rice in a serving bowl with one seared chicken thigh resting on the colorful rice with slices of Spanish chorizo visible.

Ready to make the tastiest one-pot wonder dish in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag #HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a serving of Spanish chicken and rice in a serving bowl with one seared chicken thigh resting on the colorful rice with slices of Spanish chorizo visible.
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Spanish Chicken and Rice (Arroz con Pollo)

This one-pot wonder truly is wonderful in so many ways. Go with any choice of chicken (skin-on, bone-in, or skinless-boneless), just remember the cooking time will be a little less for boneless. The flavors are deep and the clean-up is a snap!
Prep Time15 minutes
45 minutes
Total Time1 hour
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Spanish / American
Servings: 4
Calories: 856kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 ovenproof skillet with a lid 12" or larger is best

Ingredients

  • 3 lbs chicken thighs skin-on, bone-in. See NOTES
  • 3 tablespoon olive oil divided
  • salt and pepper
  • 2 teaspoon smoked paprika divided
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1½ cups Spanish chorizo cured (fully cooked), sliced
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup rice short, medium, or long-grain
  • ¼ cup white wine
  • 1 14.5 oz can fire roasted tomatoes with juice
  • 3 cups chicken broth
  • ½ teaspoon saffron threads chopped (optional)
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ⅓ cup roasted red bell pepper cut into strips
  • ⅓ cup green olives halved
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Brush the chicken with 1 tablespoon of the olive oil. Season all over with salt, pepper, and 1 teaspoon of smoked paprika.
    3 lbs chicken thighs, salt and pepper, 2 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • Heat the olive oil (2 tbsp)over medium heat in a large ovenproof skillet (or Dutch oven).
    3 tablespoon olive oil
  • Sear the chicken thighs, skin-side down, for 5 minutes, or until the skin is browned and crispy (move the chicken around with tongs or a spatula to keep the skin from sticking to the bottom of the pan). Flip the chicken and cook on the other side for another 3 minutes. Place the chicken on a platter and set aside (the chicken won't be fully cooked yet).
  • If there is too much grease/oil in the skillet, spoon off all but about 2 tbsp. Add the onion and chorizo and sauté until the onion is soft, about 4 minutes, stirring often. Stir in the garlic and sauté for another 30 seconds to 1 minute.
    1 medium onion, 1½ cups Spanish chorizo, 3 cloves garlic
  • Add the rice and stir to coat. Carefully pour in the wine and cook until most of it has evaporated, about 1 to 2 minutes.
    1 cup rice, ¼ cup white wine
  • Stir in the tomatoes (with juices), broth, saffron (if using), oregano, 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 2 teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, and the bay leaf. Bring to a boil.
    1 14.5 oz can fire roasted tomatoes, 3 cups chicken broth, ½ teaspoon saffron threads, 1 teaspoon dried oregano, 1 bay leaf
  • Stir, and then turn off the heat. Nestle the chicken pieces into the pan. Cover and place in the oven for 30 minutes, or until the rice is tender. After about 20 minutes, stir the rice (you may need to remove the chicken pieces to do this and then place them back in the pan after stirring the rice). Stir in the roasted peppers and green olives. Cover and return to the oven for the remainder of the 30 minutes.
    ⅓ cup roasted red bell pepper, ⅓ cup green olives
  • Remove the bay leaf and serve hot. Garnish with chopped parsley (or chopped scallions), if desired.
    2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube Channel. 
For the chicken pieces, you can use all skin-on, bone-in thighs, or a combination of pieces, including legs. Or you can go with an entire cut-up chicken. If using skinless, boneless chicken thighs or breasts, you can reduce the searing time. 
Saffron is traditional in Spanish cooking, however, it's a little pricey. It adds a nice depth of flavor, but it can be omitted if you'd rather not invest in it. If so, it can be found in the spice section of many supermarkets or online. 
Start checking the rice after about 20 minutes of baking. Depending on the type of rice you're using, it can take anywhere from 25 to 35 minutes for it to become tender. Be sure to stir the rice after about 20 to 25 minutes (Removing the chicken to stir the rice makes this step a little easier. Place the chicken back in the pan along with the roasted pepper and olives before returning to the oven). 
Leftovers will keep (covered) in the fridge for up to 5 days. Reheat in a dish covered with foil in a 325°F oven for 20 minutes, or until heated through. Or heat in the microwave on HIGH for 1 to 2 minutes. 

Nutrition

Calories: 856kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 67g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 254mg | Sodium: 764mg | Potassium: 899mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1189IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 75mg | Iron: 4mg

Leftover Turkey Enchiladas with Red Sauce

by 3 Comments

One of the best things about the big Turkey Day feast is all of the leftovers! And this recipe does not disappoint!

Whether you have roast turkey, smoked turkey, spatchcock turkey, or fried turkey, if you have any leftovers, be sure to save some for these epic enchiladas! We show you how to make an authentic red sauce, but, we also give an easy hack to make a yummy sauce in a matter of minutes. Serve with pico de gallo for that classic Tex-Mex flavor!

A straight-on view of a white rectangular baking dish filled with leftover turkey enchiladas with a red sauce and topped with chopped lettuce and pico de gallo.

How To Make Leftover Turkey Enchiladas with Red Sauce

The Ingredients You Will Need

For the Red Enchilada Sauce

Dried chili peppers – Such as ancho and guajillo, or a combination of them. These can be found in the Hispanic or produce section of many well-stocked supermarkets, at Hispanic food markets, or online.
Tomato – A Roma is perfect. Chopped. Don’t worry about seeding the tomato.
Garlic – Roughly chopped.
Fat – Olive oil, vegetable oil, or butter.
Onion – Chopped.
Flour – All-purpose.
Seasonings – Dried oregano, ground cumin, garlic powder, salt, and black pepper.

For the Enchiladas

Leftover turkey – Cubed. Can substitute cubed rotisserie chicken.
Green chiles – Canned. These can be found in the Hispanic section of most supermarkets. Or online. If you can’t find them, just omit them.
Seasoning – Just a pinch or two of salt.
Vegetable oil – For lightly frying the tortillas.
Tortillas – Corn is traditional. If using flour (which is delicious, too), don’t lightly fry them first.
Cheese – Any type of good melting cheese is perfect. Cheddar, Monterrey Jack, or Chihuahua are all great choices.
Lettuce – Chopped iceberg is perfect!
Pico de Gallo – Homemade is best. But, chopped tomatoes are salsa work, too!

EXPERT TIP: Typically, you’ll want to enchiladas per serving. So, if serving four people, you’ll want 8 enchiladas. This will require about 3 cups of leftover turkey.

A straight-on view of a large silver skillet that is filled with bite-sized pieces of leftover turkey in a red sauce and chopped green chiles being stirred with a wooden spatula.

Tips for Perfect Leftover Turkey Enchiladas

Make the Red Sauce from Scratch – Of course, you can find canned or bottled red enchilada sauce in the Hispanic section of most supermarkets. We even show you a super fast way to make a sauce below. But, for that restaurant-quality enchilada, you’ll want to make the sauce from scratch. If can even be made days in advance of serving.

Lightly Fry the Tortillas – This is another step that can be simplified by simply microwaving the tortillas in a damp cloth until soft. But, a quick dip in hot vegetable oil (and then submerged in the sauce), will give your enchiladas that classic taste and texture.

Serve Right From the Oven – These are definitely best served fresh from the oven. The corn tortillas are fragile and if they rest in the sauce, the will begin to fall apart. Go nice and slow when using a metal spatula to transfer the enchiladas onto dinner plates.

Don’t Forget the Toppings – Classic toppings such as chopped iceberg lettuce, pico de gallo, chopped cilantro, salsa, and even sour cream not only make the dish gorgeous, they add another layer of flavor that is classic.

EXPERT TIP: Below, we give a fast method for making red sauce. It’s not bad, but, if you’ve got a little extra time, the homemade sauce in this recipe puts the dish over the top. You just need a sturdy skillet, blender, and fine-mesh sieve (or colander).

Four photos with the first being a puréed pepper sauce being poured into a skillet and then the sauce being strained through a colander, then a corn tortilla being submerged in the sauce and then finally person building an enchilada.

How To Serve

You have options on how to serve these enchiladas. You can plate them and then serve them individually, or you can bring the dish to the table and let guests serve themselves.

Enchiladas are notoriously tricky to get from the baking to the plate without them falling apart, at least somewhat. That’s no problem if they do, they’ll still taste the same.

Take an extra large spatula and scoop the enchiladas up from the short end of them. Lift straight up and then use a fork to scoot them onto the plate.

We love to serve these with plenty of salsa, hot sauce, and sides of Mexican rice and refried beans. Make it a combo dinner and serve them with Tex-Mex beef tacos or chicken tacos!

An overhead view of a rectangular white baking dish filled with leftover turkey enchiladas in an enchilada red sauce and topped with chopped lettuce and tomatoes.

Other Recipes to Use Your Leftover Turkey

We love leftover turkey for sandwiches and bonus Thanksgiving meals. But, when that gets a little old, these recipes are sure to please. They even give the Turkey Day feast a run for the money!

These are all amazing on so many levels. But, in the meantime, isn’t this dish calling your name?

A straight-on view of a white dinner plate filled with two leftover turkey enchiladas next to a serving of refried beans and Mexican rice with a glass of beer in the background.

How To Make Easy Red Enchilada Sauce

If you are in a crunch for time and want to whip up an easy red sauce that’s not out of the can, this is pretty darn good.

  1. Heat 2 tablespoon butter or olive oil in a skillet over medium heat. Stir in 2 tablespoon flour, 2 tablespoon chili powder, and cook, stirring often, for 1 minute.
  2. Whisk in 2 cups chicken (or vegetable broth) and stir until no lumps are visible.
  3. Stir in 2 tablespoon tomato paste, 1 teaspoon oregano, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, ¾ teaspoon salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper.
  4. Stir until slightly thickened. Taste and adjust seasonings, if desired.

This sauce is not bad. But, folks, if you want the real deal, make the sauce as written, and you will not be disappointed. We promise you that!

A close-up view of a white dinner plate filled with leftover turkey enchiladas that have been half eaten revealing the turkey on the inside of the tortillas.

Ready to make the best dish in town with your leftover turkey? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of leftover turkey enchiladas in a white baking dish with a red sauce and topped with chopped lettuce and pico de gallo.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Leftover Turkey Enchiladas with Red Sauce

If you're looking for a delicious new way to use up some of that leftover Thanksgiving turkey, this is the recipe for you. The red sauce is authentic and will rival any Tex-Mex joint in town! And, the sauce can be made days in advance of serving.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time40 minutes
Chili Soaking Time1 hour
Total Time1 hour 55 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Tex-Mex, Mexican
Servings: 4
Calories: 520kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • large skillet or saucepan
  • Blender
  • Colander any fine-mesh sieve
  • baking dish 9x13"

Ingredients

For the Red Enchilada Sauce

  • 5 dried ancho chiles
  • 5 dried guajillo chiles
  • 1 plum tomato roughly chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoon olive oil or butter, divided
  • 1 medium onion chopped, save some for topping the enchiladas
  • 2 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoon oregano dried
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For the Enchiladas

  • 3 cups cooked turkey cubed
  • 1 4 oz can green chiles
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • vegetable oil for lightly frying the tortillas
  • 8 corn tortillas
  • 3 cups cheddar cheese grated
  • 1 cup iceberg lettuce chopped, for garnish
  • ½ cup pico de gallo for garnish

Instructions

Make the Red Enchilada Sauce

  • Heat a large skillet over medium-high heat. Working in a couple of batches, heat the chiles in the skillet for about 15 seconds on both sides, pressing down on them with a spoon or spatula. Remove and when cool enough to handle, use a pair of scissors to cut away the stems and then remove as many of the seeds inside the pepper as possible (don't worry if you don't get all of them, you'll strain the liquid later).
    5 dried ancho chiles, 5 dried guajillo chiles
  • Place the chiles in a large bowl and cover with about 4 to 5 cups of warm tap water. Place a small plate on top of the chiles to keep them submerged. Let them rest in the water for at least one hour.
  • Use a pair of tongs to transfer the soaked chiles to a blender. Add the chopped tomato, and garlic, and add about 3 cups of the chile soaking water. Securely place the lid on the blender and purée until smooth.
    1 plum tomato, 3 cloves garlic
  • Back in your skillet, heat 2 tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) over medium heat. Add the onions and sauté until they are soft, about 4 to 5 minutes.
    4 tablespoon olive oil, 1 medium onion
  • Carefully pour the puréed chile mixture into the skillet with the onions. Stir and bring to a simmer. Add another cup of the soaking water and simmer for about 2 minutes.
  • Place a fine-mesh sieve or colander over a heatproof bowl and strain the sauce through it, using a wooden spatula to help it through.
  • Use a paper towel to wipe out the skillet. Add the remaining 2 tablespoon olive oil (or butter) over medium heat. Stir in the flour and cook until fully absorbed, about 1 to 2 minutes.
    2 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • Whisk in the strained sauce and stir in the oregano, cumin, garlic powder, salt, and pepper. Simmer until slightly thickened, about another 4 minutes. Set aside.
    1 teaspoon oregano, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Prepare the Enchiladas

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Heat another large skillet over medium-high heat and add the turkey, green chiles, salt (½ tsp), and a quarter cup of the prepared enchilada sauce. Cook, stirring often, until heated through, about 4 to 5 minutes. Set aside.
    3 cups cooked turkey, 1 4 oz can green chiles, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Ladle enough of the sauce over the bottom of the dish just to cover it (not too much).
  • In a saucepan large enough to hold a tortilla, heat about 1 to 2 tablespoon of vegetable oil over medium heat. Once hot, quickly pass a tortilla through the oil, flipping once. Tongs or a pair of forks help you do this. Take care not to tear the tortilla, but if you do, just grab another tortilla (or go with the torn one, it will still roll just fine). You'll need to add more oil as you continue to lightly fry the tortillas.
    vegetable oil, 8 corn tortillas
  • Quickly transfer the tortilla from the skillet into the pan with the sauce. Flip the tortilla a couple of times to coat it with the sauce. Place on one end of the prepared dish. Spoon about 2 tablespoon of the grated cheese along the center of the tortilla, lengthwise. Add about 2 tablespoon of the prepared turkey over the cheese. Bring the sides of the tortilla up and press them together, one side over the other. Gently turn the enchilada seam-side down and continue this process until your dish is full (usually about 8 enchiladas).
    3 cups cheddar cheese
  • Ladle some more of the sauce over the tops of the enchiladas. Sprinkle more chopped onion over the sauce, and then sprinkle on the remaining cheese (about 1 to 1½ cups) over the enchiladas.
  • Bake for about 20 minutes, or until the cheese is melty and the sauce is just bubbling. Serve at once, topped with shredded lettuce and pico de gallo.
    1 cup iceberg lettuce, ½ cup pico de gallo

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Cubed rotisserie chicken can be used in place of the turkey. 
The enchilada sauce can be made up to 3 days in advance. It keeps (covered) in the fridge for a week. It's great to use in other recipes, including on eggs. 
Lightly frying is traditional, but, you can also wrap them in a damp paper towel and microwave them on HIGH for a minute (or less) until they are pliable. 
These enchiladas are best served right out of the oven. If they sit too long, they can become a bit mushy. However, leftovers are still delicious! Heat up in the microwave or in a 325°F oven (covered with foil) until heated through. 

Nutrition

Calories: 520kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 758mg | Potassium: 280mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 935IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 471mg | Iron: 2mg

Pecan Pie Cheesecake

by 4 Comments

We’ve taken two beloved holiday desserts and brought them together. Talk about a match made in heaven!

We love cheesecake and we love pecan pie, so, why not combine the two? For the cheesecake, we wanted to keep it light and melt-in-your-mouth creamy. There are some critical steps to make sure you follow to ensure a perfect cheesecake every single time. And no water bath is needed!

A person using a metal spatula to raise a slice of pecan pie cheesecake from the entire cake resting on a cake stand.

How To Make Pecan Pie Cheesecake

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

There no exotic ingredients or tools necessary for making this epic dessert. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

The Tools

Springform Pan – You’ll need a good-quality 9-inch pan. Farberware makes a great one!
Aluminum foil – The sturdier the better, it will keep butter from dripping for your pan.
Metal spatula – It should be nice and flat, and preferably large. This will help you move the cake from the pan onto your serving dish.

The Ingredients You Will Need

For the Crust:
Graham cracker crumbs – You can pulverize them in your food processor or place them in a baggie and crush them with a rolling pin or any heavy object.
Brown sugar – Light or dark, either is perfectly fine.
Butter – Unsalted, melted.

For the Cheesecake Filling:
Cream cheese – It’s critical that it is at room temperature.
Sugar – You’ll use both granulated and brown sugar (dark or light).
Sour cream – Measure it out in a bowl and then let it sit out on the counter for an hour to an hour and a half (it should be very close to room temperature).
Vanilla extract
Eggs – It is also critical that they are at room temperature. You can take them out of the fridge several hours before baking. They will be fine.

For the Pecan Pie Topping:
Brown sugar – Dark or light, either will work perfectly.
Butter – Unsalted. Okay to be chilled.
Cinnamon – Ground.
Pecans – Halves or pieces are okay. We go with pecan halves and like the size.
Heavy cream – Or heavy whipping cream, double cream. Can substitute half and half in a pinch.

EXPERT TIP: Use your fingers to press the crust into the base of your pan. Use the bottom of a glass jar or measuring cup to compact the crust before baking. Be sure to let the crust cool completely before adding the cheesecake batter. This can be expedited by placing the pan (with the baked crust) on a hot pad in your fridge.

Two photos with the first a person using the bottom of a glass cup to press on a graham cracker crust in a springform pan and then a shot of cheesecake batter being poured onto the crust.

Tips for Making the Perfect Cheesecake – With No Cracks

Don’t Over-mix the Batter – If you do, the mixer will incorporate air bubbles into the batter which can lead to cracking after baking.

Make Sure Ingredients Are Room Temperature – This is very important. Plan for this before you start making the cake.

Knock Out Air Bubbles – Bang the pan with the cake filling on the counter about 10 times. This helps to prevent cracking.

Don’t Overcook the Cake – Resist the temptation to open the oven door and check on the cheesecake. But, after about 55 minutes of baking, quickly do a “jiggle” test. The cake should jiggle, but not feel too liquidy.

Let Cool Down Very Gradually – This is the most important tip. Don’t rush this process. If you do, your cheesecake will definitely crack. Give yourself plenty of time for this process.

EXPERT TIP: The cream will gurgle quite a lot when you add it to the hot butter and sugar mixture. This is normal. Remember to allow the mixture to cool for about 15 minutes before adding to the cake. It will thicken somewhat during this time.

Two photos with the first being a person pouring heavy cream into a saucepan filled with simmering caramel and pecans and then a shot of a person spooning pecan caramel sauce over the top of a cheesecake.

How to Serve

You can serve the dessert in a couple of different ways. One is to add the topping before serving.

This Pecan Pie Cheesecake is delicious even after the topping cools off and becomes room temperature, but, if you can serve it while it’s still warm, it is just amazing.

Our preferred way to serve is to cut slices for guests without the topping. Then drizzle the warm topping over each serving. That way, in the rare case someone doesn’t prefer the topping, you’ll have a delicious slice of cheesecake just for them!

A close-up view of a cheesecake topped with a pecan pie sauce with a slice of cake missing.

Other Thanksgiving Dessert Recipes

Everyone is usually so stuffed after the Thanksgiving feast, they think they have no room for dessert. That is until you bring out one of these classics!

These are all perfect in so many ways. But, in the meantime, isn’t this incredible dessert calling your name?

A straight-on view of a slice of pecan pie cheesecake sitting on a white dessert plate with the full cake resting on a cake stand behind the individual serving.

This has become our favorite dessert to serve, especially during the holiday season.

If you follow these very important steps for the cheesecake, you will create a cake that is light, creamy, and about as good as you will ever taste and serve.

The warm pecan pie topping takes the dessert to the next level. You’ll want to make this cheesecake over and over. It’s really that delicious!

A straight-on view of a half eaten slice of pecan pie cheesecake on a white dessert plate with a fork also resting on the plate.

Ready to make the best Thanksgiving dessert in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a cheesecake topped with a pecan pie sauce with a slice of cake missing.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Pecan Pie Cheesecake

This combines to classic holiday dessert and the result is spectacular. You can serve the topping on individual slices, or you can top the entire cheesecake before serving. Follow our steps carefully and you'll have a perfect cheesecake every single time. No cracks!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 10 minutes
Cooling and Chilling9 hours
Total Time10 hours 30 minutes
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 9-inch springform pan
  • foil

Ingredients

For the Crust

  • cooking spray
  • 5 oz graham cracker crumbs about 1 cup, or 1 sleeve
  • 1 tablespoon brown sugar light or dark
  • 6 tablespoon unsalted butter melted

For the Cheesecake

  • 5 8 oz packages cream cheese room temperature
  • ¾ cup sugar
  • ¼ cup brown sugar light or dark
  • ½ cup sour cream room temperature
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 4 large eggs room temperature

For the Topping

  • ¾ cup brown sugar light or dark
  • 6 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 1 cup pecan halves
  • ⅓ cup heavy cream

Instructions

Make the Crust

  • Preheat oven to 350°F. Spray the springform pan with cooking spray. Cover the bottom half of the pan with foil (just in case some of the butter leaks out).
    cooking spray
  • In a medium bowl, stir together the crushed graham crackers with the butter and brown sugar. Stir until completely mixed. Press the mixture into the bottom of the prepared pan. Use the bottom of a measuring cup (or bottle) to compress the crust.
    5 oz graham cracker crumbs, 1 tablespoon brown sugar, 6 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Bake for 7 minutes. Allow it to cool completely before adding the filling.

Make the Cheesecake

  • Increase oven temperature to 450°F. Place a baking pan on the bottom grate and fill partially with water.
  • In a stand mixer (or using an electric hand mixer) on medium, mix the room-temperature cream cheese with the sugar and brown sugar. Mix until just combined, don't overmix.
    5 8 oz packages cream cheese, ¾ cup sugar, ¼ cup brown sugar
  • Beat in the sour cream and vanilla extract. Crack the eggs into a small bowl or measuring cup. Gently beat in the eggs until incorporated (again, don't overmix!).
    ½ cup sour cream, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 4 large eggs
  • Transfer the batter to the cooled pan with the crust. Smooth the top with a spatula or spoon. Bake on the middle rack for exactly 8 minutes and then lower the oven temperature to 225°F. Bake for another 60 minutes. Don't open the oven door during this process! After 60 minutes, quickly open the door and jiggle the pan slightly (with oven mitts). The cake should jiggle, but not feel liquidy. If necessary, bake for another 5 minutes.
  • Turn the heat off and leave the cheesecake in the oven (don't open!) for 30 minutes. Crack the oven slightly and place a kitchen towel in the door of the oven (just a small crack should be visible). Just enough to let some of the warm air out, but not let cool air in. Let the cheesecake sit (with the door cracked) for 1 hour.
  • Remove the cheesecake from the oven and let rest on the counter (at room temperature) for 1 to 2 hours (preferably at least 90 minutes). Then, place in the fridge (covered) to completely chill for at least 6 hours or overnight.
  • Remove the cheesecake from the fridge and run a thin, sharp knife around the edges, if they haven't already come from the sides of the pan. Release the springform, and use a large spatula to help move the cheesecake to your cake platter (or plate).

Make the Topping and Finish the Cake

  • In a medium saucepan, bring the brown sugar, butter, and cinnamon to a boil over medium-high heat. Add the pecans and simmer for 2 minutes. Remove from the heat and stir in the heavy cream. Let cool for 15 minutes.
    ¾ cup brown sugar, 6 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon, 1 cup pecan halves, ⅓ cup heavy cream
  • Drizzle the topping over the cheesecake, slice, and serve at once.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The most important steps to remember when making the cheesecake:
  1. Room temperature ingredients (including cream cheese, eggs, sour cream). 
  2. Don't over-mix. This creates air bubbles, which can cause the cake to crack. 
  3. Bang the uncooked cake in the pan on the counter 10 to 15 times to knock out air bubbles.
  4. Don't overcook! VERY important. Remember, it will continue to cook in the oven once you turn off the heat.
  5. Let it cool slowly and gradually. Also VERY important!  
The cheesecake will keep covered in the fridge for up to 1 week. We recommend setting the cheesecake out on the counter for about 30 minutes before serving. 

Smoked Turkey with Orange Honey Brine

by 2 Comments

If you have a smoker and you’ve never smoked a holiday bird before, you need to change that.

We love Thanksgiving for so many reasons. One of the best things about this beautiful holiday is the food, all that glorious food. From the classic sides like mom’s dressing, best-ever mashed potatoes, and gourmet green casserole. These are all amazing. But, the star of the feast, in most cases, is the turkey. This is our favorite method of cooking the bird.

An overhead view of a whole smoked turkey that is resting on a platter of parsley and orange slices and a carving knife nearby.

How To Make a Smoked Turkey

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

The tools you will need are as important as the ingredients. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

The Tools

Smoker – We get perfectly cooked smoked meats every single time with our Smokin’ Tex Electric Smoker. Use Promo Code “LOON10” for a 10% discount!
Chips – Wood chips or pellet chips for your smoker.
Digital thermometer – This is essential to ensure you have a perfectly cooked turkey. Click this link,  and when you order, you’ll automatically receive a How To Feed a Loon discount!
Poultry Rack – Not 100% necessary, but it makes transporting the bird from the kitchen to the smoker easier. Any type of roasting rack will work.
Brine bag – We recommend a bag that will hold a 20 to 22-lb bird and has a zip top.

The Ingredients

Turkey – 14 to 17 lb. Seek out a fresh turkey. You can find them at your local meat market or search for farms near you. If using a frozen turkey, allow it to fully thaw, preferably in your fridge, before brining.
Oranges – You’ll need the juicy and the squeezed oranges.
Honey – Go with a good quality honey.
Salt (for brining)– Kosher is perfect.
Spices – Ground ginger, ground cumin, ground mustard, ground cloves, ground allspice.
Apple cider – Often found in the produce section of your supermarket. You’ll need about a gallon and a half. Apple juice can be substituted if you can’t find apple cider.
Unsalted butter – Room temperature.
Seasonings (for the bird) – Salt and pepper.

EXPERT TIP: For maximum flavor, puncture the skin numerous times on the top of the bird, place it in the brine bag, and then spoon some of the marinade under the skin near the breast. Pour the rest of the marinade over the bird, and then add enough apple cider to cover the bird. Placing the brine bag in a cooler before doing all of this is helpful.

A person pouring a orange juice and maple marinade from a glass bow over an uncooked turkey that is snuggled into a brine bag in an upright cooler.

Tips for Making the Perfect Smoked Turkey

Fresh Is Best – We can’t stress this enough. We have cooked, roasted, fried, and smoked turkeys in many different ways over the years. The one thing that has always made a big difference with any method of cooking the bird is whether it is fresh or frozen. Fresh is always extra tender, juicy, and flavorful. Google where you can find a fresh turkey near you.

Allow Plenty of Time to Marinade – The marinade is flavorful and will also help tenderize the turkey. For maximum taste and texture, allow the bird to rest in the marinade for at least 12 hours, or up to 24 hours.

Don’t Overdo It with the Smoke – Poultry will absorb a decent amount of smoke. We recommend no more than 6 ounces of smoking right at the very beginning. Otherwise, the skin will be too smoky tasting, and even the meat will have a strong smoky taste.

Monitor the Internal Temperature – This is critical for producing a perfectly cooked, juicy, and flavorful turkey. Place a digital thermometer in the thickest part of the breast. Check several different locations. Don’t remove the bird from the smoker until you reach 160 to 165°F.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to get the softened butter under the skin as well as all over the bird. This will ensure a flavorful and deeply golden/brownish color on the fully smoked bird.

A person using his hands to rub softened butter all over the exterior of an uncooked whole turkey resting on a roasting rack.

How To Serve

There is so much to love about this smoked turkey. One of them is that you can pull it out of the smoker and let it rest for at least an hour before slicing into it.

Slice it at the table, or give yourself a break, and slice it well before serving. Use either a large, sharp knife or, even better, an electric cutting knife.

Once the turkey is sliced and arranged on your platter, cover it tightly with foil. It will stay warm for an hour to an hour and a half. Perfect for getting all the other dishes finished and ready to serve!

EXPERT TIP: Placing a pan of water on a grate underneath the turkey will keep the air moist, which will make a juicier bird. Every hour or so, feel free to spray a combination of apple juice, apple cider vinegar, orange juice, and/or water on the skin. This also helps keep it from drying out.

Two images with the first being a whole turkey resting on a rack that is on a grate inside an electric smoker and then the second image is after the turkey has been smoked and fully cooked.

Other Centerpiece Roast Recipes for Your Thanksgiving Feast

Here is a collection of centerpiece roasts that we have served over the years for our Thanksgiving feast, and they were all delicious and well-received. Choosing which one is the challenge!

These are all absolutely amazing in their own right. But, in the meantime, isn’t this smoked bird calling your name?

A straight-on view of a whole smoked-turkey that is resting on a white platter lined with fresh parsley and orange slices.

Thanksgiving is so special for so many reasons.

First and foremost, it is the perfect occasion for family and loved ones to gather and reflect on how much we all have to be thankful for.

And, of course, there is the food. You have options for preparing your centerpiece turkey. If you have a smoker, you very well may want to try this recipe. We smoke a turkey almost every Thanksgiving, and it is perfect every single time.

We love serving this alongside our gourmet green bean casserole, dressing, mashed potatoes, and turkey gravy.

Happy Thanksgiving, friends!

An overhead view of a black dinner plate filled with slices of smoked turkey topped with gravy and next to a mound of mashed potatoes, green beans, and dressing.

Ready to make the best Thanksgiving turkey on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a whole smoked-turkey that is resting on a white platter lined with fresh parsley and orange slices.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Smoked Turkey with Orange Honey Brine

Smoking your turkey ensures you get a perfectly cooked bird with a touch of smoke flavor. The brine adds amazing flavor and helps to tenderize the turkey. Give yourself enough time to let the bird sit in the marinade for 12 to 24 hours.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time7 hours
Marinating time12 hours
Total Time19 hours 15 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 496kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 6 large navel oranges
  • ¼ cup honey
  • 3 tablespoon Kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoon ground ginger
  • 2 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 2 teaspoon ground mustard
  • 1½ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ½ teaspoon ground allspice
  • 1 14 to 17 lb turkey preferably fresh, giblets and neck removed from the cavity
  • 1½ gallons apple cider
  • 6 tablespoon unsalted butter room temperature
  • salt and pepper

Instructions

  • Make the brine by mixing together the juice from the oranges with the honey, salt, ginger, cumin, mustard, cloves (ground), and allspice. Stir until the salt is mostly dissolved. Set aside.
    6 large navel oranges, ¼ cup honey, 3 tablespoon Kosher salt, 2 tablespoon ground ginger, 2 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoon ground mustard, 1½ teaspoon ground cloves, ½ teaspoon ground allspice
  • Use your fingers to gently pull the skin away from the top of the turkey. Now, use a fork to puncture the turkey over the top and the legs. Stuff the cavity of the bird with the squeezed orange halves.
    1 14 to 17 lb turkey
  • Place your brine bag in a medium to large cooler. Place the turkey in the bring bag, legs facing upwards.
  • Spoon some of the marinade under the skin of the top of the turkey. Pour the rest of the marinade around (and on top) of the turkey. Pour in enough apple cider to cover the turkey. Close the brine bag and the cooler. If your cooler will fit in your refrigerator, place it there. If not, add ice over the top of the brine bag and keep the cooler in a cool spot in your house. You may need to add more ice every now and then. Allow the turkey to rest in the marinade for 12 to 24 hours.
    1½ gallons apple cider
  • Add about 6 ounces of wood chips to the wood box of your smoker.
  • Gently remove the turkey from the brine bag and pat it dry with paper towels. Leave the orange slices in the cavity.
  • Rub the softened butter all over the top of the bird and the legs. Liberally sprinkle salt and pepper all over the bird.
    6 tablespoon unsalted butter, salt and pepper
  • Add a pan filled about halfway with water on the bottom grate of the smoker.
  • Place the turkey on a poultry rack (optional) and place it on the grate above the pan of water. Add the smoke box, close the door, and turn the smoker to 225°F.
  • Smoke for about 30 minutes per pound until an internal temperature of 160 to 165°F. Add apple cider and water (or a combination of water and apple cider vinegar) in a spray bottle and spray the bird every couple of hours or so.
  • Once the internal temperature reaches 160 to 165°F, bring the bird inside and let it rest for at least 30 minutes, or up to 1½ hours. Slice and serve at once, or, cover and serve within a couple of hours.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If you are using a frozen turkey, we recommend thawing it in your refrigerator for several days before brining. For a quicker thaw time, place the turkey (still in the packaging) in a sink (or tub) filled with cool water. The turkey will be thawed within 6 to 8 hours.  Remember...a fresh turkey is best and won't be frozen. You can find fresh turkeys at farms, meat markets, and specialty food markets. 
The turkey is wonderful served warm or at room temperature. Leftovers are wonderful and will keep in the fridge (covered) for up to 1 week. They can also be frozen for up to several months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 496kcal | Carbohydrates: 104g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 2650mg | Potassium: 934mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 86g | Vitamin A: 537IU | Vitamin C: 69mg | Calcium: 117mg | Iron: 2mg

Reverse-Sear Ribeye with Gorgonzola Sauce

by 4 Comments

If you’re looking for a dish with true “wow” power, this is it.

Enjoying a “special occasion” meal with that special person (or persons) is even better when it’s made from scratch in your very own kitchen. The reverse-sear method will give you a perfectly cooked steak every single time. We love to serve this with roasted balsamic potatoes and simmered green beans.

A straight-on view of a ribeye steak that has about half of it cut into sliced and is topped with a creamy gorgonzola sauce and served with roasted potatoes and green beans.

How To Make Reverse-Sear Ribeye with Gorgonzola Sauce

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

This is one of those extra-special dinners that you may want to consider spending a little extra on the steak. If not, look for a nicely marbled cut of beef, but not too fatty. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Ribeye – We recommend going with a Prime cut rather than Choice. Click here to learn more.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper is all you need.
Pancetta – Cubed, usually found near the deli/prepared food section of you supermarket. You could also go with chopped prosciutto or even chopped bacon.
Oil – Olive oil, or extra virgin.
Butter – Unsalted.
Onions – 2 large yellow (or white) or 3 medium onions, thinly sliced.
Sherry – Dry is best. If you don’t want to cook with wine, simply omit this from the recipe.
Cream – Heavy, whipping, double cream is recommended. Half and half can be substituted.
Rosemary – Fresh is always best.
Green onions – Also known as scallions. Use the white parts up through the pale green. Chopped.
Gorgonzola – Crumbled. Blue cheese is a great substitution.
Coarse sea salt – For garnish, optional.

EXPERT TIP: For the sherry, the following are wonderful options: Fino, Manzanilla, Amontillado, or Oloroso. We have substituted Madeira and it is wonderful, too. You can also substitute a dry white wine. If you don’t want to cook with wine, simply omit it.

A person pouring Sherry from a small wine carafe into an oval Dutch oven filled with caramelized onions and crispy cubed pancetta.

Tips for Doing a Perfect Reverse-Sear Ribeye

Choose the Right Cut – Select a thick cut of steak, such as ribeye, sirloin, or filet mignon, ideally at least 1.5 to 2 inches thick. Thicker cuts are ideal for the reverse-sear method, as they allow for a perfectly cooked interior while achieving a beautifully seared crust.

Low and Slow Cooking – Start by cooking the steak in an oven or grill at a low temperature (around 225°F or 107°C) until it reaches an internal temperature about 10-15°F below your desired doneness. This gentle cooking method ensures even doneness throughout the steak without overcooking the outer layers.

Sear at High Heat – Once the steak reaches the desired internal temperature, remove it from the oven and let it rest for a few minutes. Then, sear the steak in a hot cast-iron skillet or on a grill over high heat for 1-2 minutes per side to develop a flavorful, caramelized crust.

Finish with Coarse Salt – Just before serving, sprinkle with finishing salt, such as coarse sea salt, to enhance the flavor and add a delightful crunch.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to turn the heat off before stirring in the cheese. The sauce can be prepared in advance, but it will thicken as it rests. If you want a more spreadable sauce, reheat it and a few dashes of beef broth or more cream.

A person transferring crumbled Gorgonzola cheese from a small glass bowl into an oval Dutch oven that is filled with a simmering caramelized onion and cream sauce.

How To Serve

After you’ve seared the steaks over high heat, they are ready to be served. No need to let the steaks rest.

We like to slice the steak into strips and then drizzle some of the sauce over the top.

If desired, you can leave the steak unsliced and serve the sauce in a vessel at the table and let guests add as much (or as little) as they want.

EXPERT TIP: It’s critical that your skillet (or grill) is very hot before you sear the steaks. We heat our cast-iron skillet for about 5 minutes and then add the oil, and then the steaks. Use the back of a wooden spatula or spoon to press down on the steaks so they brown evenly.

A close-up view of two large ribeye steaks that are being seared in a hot cast-iron skillet with sizzling butter and oil under the meat.

Other Amazing Steak Recipes to Try

If you love a good steak as much as we do, you are going to flip for the following recipes! They are a beef lovers’ dream come true!

These are all epic in their own way. But, in the meantime, isn’t this masterpiece calling your name?

A person using a silver spoon to drizzle a Gorgonzola sauce over a sliced ribeye steak on a black plate also holding roasted potatoes and green beans.

We come from the school of thought that if a steak is good enough, it doesn’t need a sauce.

Well, that was before we came up with this creamy gorgonzola sauce.

The reverse sear guarantees a perfectly juicy and tender steak. The sauce takes it to another level. Every bite is a steak lover’s dream come true!

A straight-on view of reverse-seared ribeye with gorgonzola sauce on a black dinner plate alongside a helping of roasted potatoes.

Ready to make a steak dinner that will rival the best steakhouse in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a reverse-sear ribeye steak with gorgonzola on a black dinner plate alongside a helping of roasted potatoes and steamed green beans.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Reverse-Sear Ribeye with Gorgonzola Sauce

This is one of those "special" occasion dishes. The method of reverse-sear guarantees a perfectly juicy, tender steak every single time. The gorgonzola sauce with caramelized onions puts it over the top. For an extra-special dish, get Prime cuts of ribeye, about 1½-inch thick from your local butcher. Epic!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour
Total Time1 hour 15 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 people
Calories: 745kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • baking sheet with baking rack
  • Digital thermometer this is critical
  • Large skillet cast-iron or non-stick are both excellent

Ingredients

  • 4 ribeye steaks about 1½" thick, each
  • salt and pepper
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 4 oz pancetta cubed
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 4 medium yellow onions thinly sliced, or 2 large onions
  • ¼ cup Sherry
  • 1 tablespoon rosemary fresh, chopped
  • 3 green onions white and pale green parts, thinly sliced
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • ½ cup Gorgonzola cheese crumbled
  • Coarse sea salt for finishing

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 215°F.
  • Liberally season the steaks all over with salt and pepper. Place on a baking rack on a baking sheet. Place in the oven and cook until the desired doneness: 115°F for medium-rare, 125°F for medium, 135°F for medium well. A digital thermometer ensures correct internal temperature. Cook time is typically between 50 to 70 minutes. The steaks will rise in temperature another 10 degrees when you sear them in a hot skillet or on a hot grill.
    4 ribeye steaks, salt and pepper
  • Once the steaks go in, start on the sauce. Heat the oil over medium heat in a large Dutch oven or skillet. Add the pancetta and cook until crispy, about 5 minutes. Remove with a slotted spoon and place on a plate lined with paper towels.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 4 oz pancetta
  • Add the butter to the pan and stir until melted. Add the onions and sauté until caramelized and dark brown, about 30 to 40 minutes.
    2 tablespoon unsalted butter, 4 medium yellow onions
  • Add the Sherry and cook, stirring often, until most of the liquid has evaporated, about 2 minutes. Stir in the pancetta, rosemary, green onions, and heavy cream. Cook, stirring often, until slightly thickened, about 2 minutes.
    ¼ cup Sherry, 1 tablespoon rosemary, 3 green onions, 1 cup heavy cream
  • Turn off the heat and stir in the Gorgonzola until melted.
    ½ cup Gorgonzola cheese
  • Heat a skillet (or your grill) to high heat for 3 to 5 minutes. Add 2 tablespoon olive oil to the skillet. Remove the steaks from the oven and carefully place them in the hot skillet (or grill). Sear for 40 seconds, add 1 tablespoon of butter (only if searing in the skillet), and flip and sear the other side for another 40 seconds. You will need to do this in batches, depending on the size of your skillet.
  • Place the steaks on a cutting board and, if desired, cut them into strips. Sprinkle each steak with coarse sea salt. Serve at once with the sauce drizzled over the top of each steak, or serve the sauce in a bowl at the table.
    Coarse sea salt

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You can substitute any good steak for this recipe. Strip steak (NY / Kansas City) or Filet mignon, are both great options. 
If the sauce gets done before the steaks are finished it may thicken a bit. If it feels too thick, simply add a splash or two of beef broth or cream and then lightly heat on the stove until heated through and to the desired consistency. The sauce will be thick, but still pourable. 
Leftovers will keep, covered, in the fridge for up to 5 days. They make for amazing steak sandwiches (with a layer of the gorgonzola sauce)! 

Nutrition

Calories: 745kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 55g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 249mg | Sodium: 491mg | Potassium: 957mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1309IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 172mg | Iron: 5mg

POST UPDATE: This was originally published in January 2018, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous video in November, 2024.

Best-Ever Shrimp Fajitas

by 1 Comment

Fajitas have become a staple on Tex-Mex and Mexican menus worldwide for several decades. We are huge fans of them. Wait until you try this version.

We’re not going to lie, we are huge fans of steak fajitas. But, folks, this seafood version gives the juicy steak version a real run for its money. Top with pico de gallo, crumbled Cotija cheese, chopped cilantro, and a squeeze of lime for an unforgettable culinary creation. And, it will be on the table in about 30 minutes!

An overhead view of a large fajita skillet filled with a serving of shrimp fajitas with bowls of all the fixings nearby including pice de gallo, lime wedges, and crumbled Cotija cheese.

How To Make Shrimp Fajitas

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients for this dish are not exotic and many you probably already have. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Oil – Olive oil or vegetable oil is perfectly fine.
Onion – Yellow or White. Peeled and sliced.
Bell peppers – We love sliced red, yellow, and orange. They are slightly sweet and match perfectly with the seasoned shrimp. Go with one, or a combination of them.
Shrimp – Extra-large is our recommendation. Deveined and shells (and tails) removed.
Seasonings – Chili powder, ground cumin, smoked paprika, onion powder, salt, and black pepper.
Tortillas – Flour is traditional, however, if you prefer corn, they are great, too! We heat them over a flame on a gas stove or on a grill to lightly char them in spots.
Garnishes – Pico de gallo, salsa, grated cheese (Cotija is excellent), limes, chopped fresh parsley, and bottled hot sauce. Sour cream, sliced avocados, and guacamole are good, too!

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to sauté the vegetables until they are very tender and the onions are starting to brown. This usually takes about 15 minutes. If you prefer your peppers more al denté (not as tender), then only sauté them for 10 minutes.

A close-up view of strips of red, yellow, and orange bell peppers and onions that are being sautéed in a large cast-iron skillet.

Tips for Making the Best-Ever Shrimp Fajitas

Go With Quality Shrimp – Seek out top-notch shrimp, if possible. Gulf shrimp are excellent. Frozen is fine, but check where they were caught. Wild-caught is excellent. Whole Foods has quality seafood.

Use Fresh Vegetables – Choose a colorful mix of fresh bell peppers and onions for sautéing. Slice them into uniform strips to ensure even cooking, and consider adding other vegetables like zucchini or mushrooms for extra texture and flavor.

Cook at High Heat – Sauté the marinated shrimp and vegetables in a hot skillet or cast-iron pan to achieve a nice sear and caramelization. Cooking at high heat helps develop those delicious charred flavors while keeping the shrimp tender and juicy.

Serve with Fresh Toppings – Enhance your shrimp fajitas with fresh toppings like avocado or guacamole, salsa, sour cream, and chopped cilantro. Warm tortillas (flour or corn) are essential. Serve them family-style so guests can customize their fajita according to their tastes.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to sauté the shrimp until they are fully cooked. They will curl up and turn pink. The seasoning may make it difficult to see the pinkness. Typically, they take about 5 to 8 minutes to fully cook them. Don’t overcook them, otherwise, they will become rubbery.

A close-up view of seasoned shrimp that are being cooked in a large black cast-iron skillet with a wooden spatula in the pan, too.

How To Serve

We love to serve our fajitas on a piping hot fajita skillet. We place the skillet on a hot stove burner for about 5 minutes, and then when we’re ready to serve, quickly transfer the sautéed onions and peppers onto it, and then top with the cooked shrimp.

The sizzle is classic, and fun, and feels like you’re at an awesome Tex-Mex restaurant.

If you don’t have a fajita skillet, don’t worry! Just mix the onions and peppers with the cooked shrimp and serve directly from the skillet.

An overhead view of a round black plate filled with two open shrimp fajitas with a skilled filled with more of the fajitas nearby as well as toppings and a glass of beer.

Other Classic Seafood Mexican Recipes

If you love Tex-Mex, Cal-Mex, and Mexican cuisine, and you also enjoy seafood, this collection of recipes is for you!

These are all amazing without a doubt. But, in the meantime, aren’t these fajitas calling your name? Don’t forget the hot sauce!

A close-up view of a person dribbling hot sauce from a bottle onto an open shrimp fajita on a lightly charred flour tortilla.

Other Classic Tex-Mex Recipes to Try

We couldn’t just stop with seafood recipes. Here are some classic Tex-Mex recipes that will rival your favorite Tex-Mex restaurant.

These are all so good! And so are these shrimp fajitas! Yum!

A straight-on view of a large fajita skillet filled with shrimp fajitas resting on sautéed onions and bell pepper strips with lime wedges on the side.

Folks, these fajitas are restaurant-quality and so easy to prepare at home.

The peppers have a touch of sweetness which works perfectly with the seasoned shrimp.

You can even skewer the shrimp and cook them on your grill. No matter how you do it, you and your loved ones will be talking about these fajitas for days!

A close-up view of a person holding a prepared shrimp fajita garnished with pico de gallo, cotija cheese, and chopped fresh cilantro.

Ready to make the best fajitas this side of the Rio Grande? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large fajita skillet filled with a serving of shrimp fajitas with bowls of all the fixings nearby including pice de gallo, lime wedges, and crumbled Cotija cheese.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Best-Ever Shrimp Fajitas

These fajitas are about as good as they come and are restaurant-quality. And what's even better is that they are on the table in about 30 minutes!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Total Time30 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Tex-Mex, Mexican
Servings: 2
Calories: 538kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large skillet
  • 1 fajita skillet optional

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 lb shrimp extra-large, deveined and peeled
  • 4 tablespoon olive oil divided
  • 2 cups bell peppers seeded and cut into strips
  • 1 large onion peeled and cut into strips
  • 6 flour tortillas
  • 2 tablespoon cilantro fresh, chopped
  • 2 limes cut into wedges
  • pico de gallo for garnish
  • Cotija cheese for garnish
  • hot sauce for garnish

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, mix together the chili powder, cumin, paprika, onion powder, salt, and pepper.
    1 tablespoon chili powder, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon smoked paprika, ½ teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Place the shrimp in a large bowl and add 2 tablespoon oil. Stir to coat the shrimp. Add the seasonings and toss to fully coat.
    1 lb shrimp, 4 tablespoon olive oil
  • Heat the remaining 2 tablespoon of the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the bell peppers and onion and sauté, stirring often, until softened and lightly charred, about 15 minutes. Transfer to a bowl.
    2 cups bell peppers, 1 large onion
  • In the same skillet, add the shrimp and cook, stirring often, until no longer pink and cooked through, about 5 to 7 minutes. Set aside.
  • Heat a fajita skillet over high heat for about 3 to 5 minutes. Carefully add the onions/peppers to the fajita skillet and then top with the cooked shrimp. Or, mix the sautéed onions/peppers with the shrimp in the skillet you cooked the onions and shrimp in.
  • Heat the tortillas over a gas flame, on your grill, or in the microwave.
    6 flour tortillas
  • Garnish with chopped cilantro and a squeeze of fresh lime. Serve at once with all the fixings at the table.
    2 tablespoon cilantro, 2 limes, pico de gallo, Cotija cheese, hot sauce

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 

Nutrition

Calories: 538kcal | Carbohydrates: 56g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 1683mg | Potassium: 680mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 6169IU | Vitamin C: 216mg | Calcium: 162mg | Iron: 5mg

Classic Minestrone Soup

by 1 Comment

Soup is universally loved by so many, and this soup is one of the most beloved. And for good reason!

There’s no question about it, we love soup. Especially when the temperatures start to drop outside and the leaves change color and dazzle the countryside. This soup is a celebration of everything we love about soup. The homemade vegetable stock puts this in a class of its own. And, don’t tell anyone, but it’s very healthy and low-calorie, too!

How To Make Classic Minestrone Soup

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

We’re keeping this recipe vegetarian. If desired, you can sauté cubed salt pork or pancetta to add to the vegetables. You can also use chicken stock or broth in place of vegetable stock. Also, use whatever are your favorite veggies! Here’s what we suggest:

Dried white beans – Such as cannellini or Great Northern beans. In a pinch, you can use canned beans, drained and rinsed.
Oil – Olive oil or extra virgin.
Vegetables to be sautéed (any or all) – Onion, carrot, celery, leek, garlic. Uniformly chopped.
Herbs – Fresh Italian parsley and basil, chopped.
Tomato paste – Mixed with a little water.
Tomatoes – Fresh or canned. See NOTES.
Vegetables for Simmering – Cabbage and zucchini, uniformly chopped.
Broth – Homemade vegetable stock or chicken broth is best. Boxed or canned will work in a pinch.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper. See NOTES about salt.
Short pasta – Ditalini is traditional, but any kind of small pasta will work.
Parmesan cheese – Freshly grated, for garnish.

EXPERT TIP: Sauté the vegetables in the oil until they are beginning to turn soft and dark on the edges. The carrots will still be al dente, but they will soften as they simmer in the stock.

An overhead view of chopped onions, carrots, celery, and leeks being sautéed in a large black pot and being stirred with a wooden spatula.

Tips for Making Perfect Classic Minestrone Soup

Homemade Stock Is Essential – We can’t stress this enough. Making the vegetable (or chicken) stock from scratch takes this soup to the next level. It can be prepared days in advance of making the soup.

Use Seasonal Vegetables – Incorporate a variety of seasonal vegetables such as carrots, celery, zucchini, potatoes, and tomatoes for a fresh and vibrant flavor. This not only enhances the taste but also adds color and texture to the soup.

Sauté Aromatics First – Begin by sautéing aromatics like onions, garlic, and leeks in olive oil until they are soft and fragrant. This step builds a flavorful base for your minestrone and allows the flavors to develop before adding the other ingredients.

Don’t Simmer For Hours – Simmering the soup is essential to deepen the flavor profile. However, if you let it simmer for multiple hours, the veggies could start to break down. We recommend simmering for a minimum of 45 minutes and no more than 2 hours.

A person pouring homemade vegetable stock from a large glass measuring cup into a black pot filled with chopped zucchini, carrots, cabbage, and other vegetables.

How To Serve

Once the soup is ready to serve, be sure to have plenty of freshly grated Parmesan on hand.

Crusty bread is a must, too. The broth in this soup is amazing when soaked up with fresh bread.

We grill up Italian sausage or chicken to round out a complete and satisfying meal.

EXPERT TIP: Add the beans and the pasta in the final 15 minutes of simmering. Remember the pasta will expand as it cooks.

Two images with the first a person transferring cooked white beans from a white bowl into a pot of simmering minestrone soup and then the next is small tubular pasta being transferred into the pot.

Other Classic Soup Recipes to Try

We can hardly think of warm-weather soup that we don’t love. Here is a collection of our favorites that we are certain you and your family will cherish as well:

These are all amazing in their own way. Each one is so good and always comforting. But, in the meantime, isn’t this bowl of deliciousness calling your name?

EXPERT TIP: Seasoning is critical. This soup can take a decent amount of salt. But, be sure to add the salt in increments. If you are using purchased broth or stock, they are usually pre-salted. Taste before serving and add more until it tastes just right. And remember, the Parmesan cheese is somewhat salty, but so good!

A straight-on view of a person grating a block of Parmesan cheese across a microplane over a soup bowl filled with classic minestrone soup.

When it comes to soups, this one is near the top of the list of favorites from all over the world.

The depth of flavor is so comforting. The combination of tender vegetables, soft white beans, and pasta puts it in a class all of its own.

And remember, the homemade vegetable stock is not hard to make and takes the soup to the next level. It’s soup perfection!

A straight-on view a white soup bowl filled with classic minestrone soup topped with grated Parmesan cheese and a pot of the soup in the background.

Ready to make the best soup on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a black pot and a large wooden ladle lifting a serving of classic minestrone soup up out of the pot.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Classic Minestrone Soup

This is one of the most beloved soups in the world. Adapt it to what you have on hand or looks best at the market. Making the vegetable (or chicken) stock from scratch is not difficult and takes the soup to the next level. Enjoy!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 15 minutes
Preparing the Vegetable Stock1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time3 hours 5 minutes
Course: Appetizer or Soup
Cuisine: Italian
Servings: 8
Calories: 173kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large pot or Dutch oven

Ingredients

  • 8 cups vegetable stock or chicken stock, or water
  • 8 oz dried white beans
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 cup carrots peeled and chopped
  • 1 cup celery chopped
  • 1 leek washed and chopped (white part only)
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon Italian parsley fresh, chopped
  • 1 tablespoon basil fresh, chopped
  • 2 tablespoon tomato paste combined with 2 tablespoon water
  • 2 15 oz cans diced tomatoes 1 drained, 1 un-drained
  • ¼ small green cabbage chopped, about 1 cup
  • 1 zucchini chopped
  • 1½ tablespoon Kosher salt only if stock is unsalted. See NOTES.
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup pasta short pasta, such as ditalini, elbow, or small shells
  • Parmesan cheese grated, for garnish

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Prepare the vegetable stock. Can be done up to 3 days in advance. (click on link for recipe)
    8 cups vegetable stock
  • Cover the beans with water in a bowl and let soak overnight.
    8 oz dried white beans

Prepare the Soup

  • Drain the beans, rinse, place in a pot, and cover with a couple of inches of water. Add about 1 teaspoon of salt. Bring to a boil and then simmer for 1 hour, or until the beans are tender. Remove from heat, drain, and set aside.
  • Heat the oil over medium heat in a large pot or Dutch oven. Add the onions, carrots, celery, and leek and sauté until starting to soften, about 15 minutes.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 medium onion, 1 cup carrots, 1 cup celery, 1 leek
  • Stir in the garlic, parsley, and basil and cook for 1 minute.
    3 cloves garlic, 1 tablespoon Italian parsley, 1 tablespoon basil
  • Add the paste (with water) and stir until the vegetables are coated, about another few minutes.
    2 tablespoon tomato paste
  • Add the tomatoes (1 can undrained and 1 can drained). Stir in the cabbage, zucchini, vegetable stock (8 to 9 cups), salt, and pepper. Bring to a strong simmer and then lower the heat and simmer on low for 45 minutes.
    2 15 oz cans diced tomatoes, ¼ small green cabbage, 1 zucchini, 1½ tablespoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Stir in the prepared beans and pasta and cook, stirring occasionally, until the pasta is soft and cooked.
    1 cup pasta
  • Serve with grated Parmesan as garnish.
    Parmesan cheese

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If using purchased stock or broth, it might already contain salt. Add a couple of teaspoons of salt to the soup, taste, and add more until it's just right. Don't under-season the soup, but be careful to not add too much salt.  
If you don't have time to soak the beans overnight, you can boil them for 2 to 3 minutes, turn the heat off and cover for 1 hour. Then, proceed with the recipe as written. If using canned beans (2 15 oz. cans), rinse before adding to the soup. 
The soup will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 to 7 days. It freezes beautifully for 2 to 3 months. Reheat in a pot. Leftovers are amazing! 

Nutrition

Calories: 173kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 723mg | Potassium: 788mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 3605IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 108mg | Iron: 4mg

Homemade Vegetable Stock

by 1 Comment

Homemade stock, or broth, is a game-changer for many soups and sauces, and this one is no exception.

Finding decent store-bought broths or stocks is not hard to find nowadays. But, the boxed (or canned) variety will never hold a candle to homemade. This stock is easy to make and will take soups like classic minestrone and broccoli cheddar soup to the next level.

A straight-on view of two glass Mason jars that are filled with homemade vegetable stock with lids fastened on the tops of the jars and vegetables surrounding them, too.

How To Make Homemade Vegetable Stock

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As you might expect, really all you need to make amazing vegetable stock are vegetables! The wine and herbs add a depth of flavor. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

  • Onion
  • Carrots
  • Celery
  • Leek
  • Garlic
  • Flat-leaf parsley
  • Tomatoes
  • Black peppercorns
  • Bay leaf
  • White wine
  • Water
  • Salt (optional)

EXPERT TIP: You’ll want to sauté the roughly chopped onion, carrots, celery, leek, and garlic until they are softened and starting to brown. This usually takes about 15 to 20 minutes.

An overhead view of roughly cut onion, carrots, celery, and onion in an oval Dutch oven and are being sautéed.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Vegetable Stock

Use a Variety of Vegetables – Incorporate a diverse mix of vegetables for a richer flavor, including aromatics like onions, carrots, and celery, along with garlic, leeks, mushrooms, and herbs like thyme or parsley. Avoid using starchy vegetables like potatoes, as they can make the stock cloudy.

Roast for More Depth of Flavor – This isn’t required, but, if you have the time, for a more robust flavor, consider roasting your vegetables in the oven before simmering them in water. This caramelization enhances the overall taste of the stock, adding depth and complexity.

Simmer Slowly – After sautéing your vegetables, add the cold water, and then bring it to a gentle simmer. Allow the stock to simmer for at least 1 hour, but no more than 2 hours. Skim off any foam that rises to the surface for a clearer stock.

Strain and Season – Once the stock has finished simmering, strain it through a fine-mesh sieve or cheesecloth to remove the solids. Taste the stock and adjust the seasoning with salt if desired, but keep in mind that it’s best to season later when using the stock in recipes to maintain versatility.

EXPERT TIP: You may need to add a little more water during the simmering process. You’ll want to have about 8 to 9 cups of broth once it is strained.

A person pouring water from a large glass measuring cup into an oval Dutch oven filled with chopped vegetables and fresh parsley.

Other Stock and Broth Recipes To Try

Homemade stocks and broths are essential to take many of your dishes to the next level. And they freeze perfectly! Here are the classics:

These are absolutely wonderful, but, this vegetable stock is the easiest to make and is also very healthy. It’s even delicious on its own!

A person using a large wooden ladle to transfer homemade vegetable stock from a stock pan into a glass Mason jar.

There are so many reasons to love this recipe.

It’s not difficult. You can prepare in less than 2 hours.

The flavor is deep and truly mouth-watering. It’s low-calorie.

And, it will take your soups and sauces to the next level!

A person using two hands to hold a glass Mason jar filled with homemade vegetable stock.

Ready to make the best vegetable stock in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of two glass Mason jars that are filled with homemade vegetable stock with lids fastened on the tops of the jars and vegetables surrounding them, too.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Homemade Vegetable Stock

When you make this stock from scratch, it will take your soups and sauce to the next level. This one doesn't require hours and hours of simmering. It's easy, delicious, and low-calorie! Perfection!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 15 minutes
Total Time1 hour 30 minutes
Course: Soup
Cuisine: French / American
Servings: 8
Calories: 101kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large stock pot or Dutch oven
  • Strainer or colander

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 medium carrots peeled and roughly chopped
  • 1 large onion peeled and roughly chopped
  • 2 large celery ribs roughly chopped
  • 1 large leek washed and roughly chopped
  • 6 cloves garlic crushed
  • 5 sprigs Italian parsley fresh
  • 3 medium tomatoes quartered
  • 10 black peppercorns
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ¾ cup white wine
  • 8½ cups water
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt optional

Instructions

  • Heat oil in a large pot or Dutch oven over medium heat. Add the carrots, onion, celery, leek, and garlic and sauté for 15 minutes, until starting to soften and lightly brown on the edges.
    3 tablespoon olive oil, 2 medium carrots, 1 large onion, 2 large celery ribs, 1 large leek, 6 cloves garlic
  • Add the parsley, tomatoes, peppercorns, bay leaf, wine, and water. Stir to combine. Increase heat to medium-high and bring to a boil. Lower the heat back to medium and simmer for 45 minutes to 1 hour.
    5 sprigs Italian parsley, 3 medium tomatoes, 10 black peppercorns, 1 bay leaf, ¾ cup white wine, 8½ cups water
  • Carefully strain the stock into a heatproof pot or bowl. If desired, stir in salt. Use immediately, or store and chill for later use.
    2 teaspoon Kosher salt

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
We don't usually salt the stock unless we are serving it on its own.  If using it to cook with, you'll add the salt to the recipe you're preparing. 
Once the stock is finished cooking, you can use it immediately, or store it in a container with a lid and chill for up to 1 week. The stock can be frozen for several months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 101kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 613mg | Potassium: 253mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 3183IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 1mg

Caramel Layer Cake

by 1 Comment

Fall is the perfect time for baking and this cake is about as good as they come.

When the leaves start to change and the temperatures begin dropping, there is just something special about baking delicious breads and desserts. Confections like apple fritters, cream cheese apple bars, and pumpkin butterscotch bread are some of our favorites. But there is just something stunning about this cake. Beautiful and so delicious!

A straight-on view of a caramel layer cake that has homemade caramel drizzled over the tops and sides as well as circular pile of pecans on the top center of the cake.

How To Make Caramel Layer Cake


NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

This cake is buttery and delicious. You’ll need plenty of butter for both the cake and the frosting. Here’s everything you’ll need to have on hand to make this glorious cake:

For the Cake

Unsalted butter – Room temperature (you’ll need to sticks).
Sugar – Granulated.
Eggs – Preferably cage-free.
Flour – Self-rising.
Buttermilk – Whole or low-fat.
Vanilla extract
Pecans – For topping the cake

For the Caramel Frosting

Sugar – Granulated.
Corn syrup – Light.
Butter – 1 stick chilled (and cubed), and 2 more at room temperature (that’s a total of 5 sticks of butter).
Cream – Heavy or double.
Confectioners’ sugar – Also known as powdered sugar.

EXPERT TIP: We recommend greasing (cooking spray or softened butter) and flouring you pans before adding the parchment paper and then again. This will help the cake easily come out of the pans and not stick. You can also use 2 pans (instead of 3), or bake it in a 9×13″ dish. See NOTES.

A person using a rubber spatula to transfer white cake batter from a mixing bowl into a 9-inch cake ban that has been greased and floured.

Tips for Making a Perfect Caramel Layer Cake

Use Room-Temperature Ingredients – Ensure that your butter and eggs are at room temperature before mixing. Let the buttermilk sit about 20 minutes outside the fridge before adding. This helps create a smooth batter that incorporates air more effectively, resulting in a light and fluffy cake.

Make a Rich Caramel Sauce – For the homemade caramel sauce, cook the sugar, without stirring it, until it melts and turns a deep amber color. Carefully add butter and cream to create a smooth, rich sauce. Allow it to cool slightly before making the frosting. Be sure to leave some for drizzling over the cake.

Layer with Care – The cakes are somewhat delicate. Use both hands to gently transfer them to the cake platter before icing. Apply the icing liberally before spreading. This will help prevent the cake from crumbling and mixing with the icing.

Top with Pecans – This is optional, but we think the addition of chopped to the top of the cake delivers amazing crunch and flavor. Place a mound of whole pecans in the center of the cake and then surround those with chopped pecans. Then drizzle on the extra caramel!

A spoon being used to drizzle homemade caramel sauce over the top of a caramel layer cake that is topped with chopped pecans.

How To Serve

This cake is best served at room temperature, but you can certainly heat individual slices gently in the microwave if desired.

Make extra caramel sauce for serving. Folks love the caramel!

For the ultimate dessert, we love to serve guests a nice large slice of cake topped with homemade vanilla ice cream and another drizzle of caramel sauce. Heavenly!

However, just a single slice is nothing short of dessert perfection!

A straight-on view of a single serving of caramel layer cake on a white dessert plate with the cake in the background.

Other Classic Cake Recipes to Try

There is just something extra special about homemade cake. Kids and adults can’t get enough of them. Here is a collection of our favorites:

These are all amazing, without a doubt. But, in the meantime, isn’t this gorgeous cake calling your name?

A straight-on view of a caramel layer cake sitting on a wooden cake platter and the cake has a large portion of the cake missing revealing the layers of white cake and caramel frosting.

If you love cake and if you love caramel, this is the cake for you.

The frosting is a sweet tooth’s dream come true. The cake itself is moist, buttery, and the perfect complement to the frosting.

Once you add the pecans and extra caramel sauce over the tops and sides of the cake, you will have a stunning cake to serve to loved ones. Every bite is dessert heaven!

A straight-on view of a single serving of caramel layer cake on a white dessert plate with the cake in the background.

Ready to make the best cake in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a caramel layer cake that has homemade caramel drizzled over the tops and sides as well as circular pile of pecans on the top center of the cake.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Caramel Layer Cake

The cake is a standard white cake and complements the sweet caramel icing perfectly. You can bake this in 3 cake pans, 2 cake pans, or 1 9x13" baking dish (see NOTES).
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time25 minutes
Resting and Frosting1 hour 15 minutes
Total Time2 hours
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 1213kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 3 9-inch cake pans See NOTES
  • Parchment paper
  • Stand mixer or hand mixer
  • large sturdy skillet

Ingredients

For the Cake

  • cooking spray
  • all-purpose flour for dusting pans
  • 1 cup unsalted butter room temperature (2 sticks)
  • 2 cups sugar
  • 4 large eggs preferably room temperature
  • 3 cups self-rising flour
  • 1 cup buttermilk
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • caramel frosting recipe below
  • ⅓ cup caramel sauce reserved, for garnishing
  • 1½ cups pecans

For the Caramel Frosting

  • 2 cups sugar
  • ¼ cup water
  • 2 tablespoon light corn syrup
  • ½ cup unsalted butter cubed and chilled, 1 stick
  • 1¼ cup heavy cream heated, divided
  • 1 cup unsalted butter room temperature, 2 sticks
  • 5 cups confectioners' sugar

Instructions

Make the Cake

  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Spray 3 (9-inch) cake pans with cooking spray and then sprinkle on flour. Shake off excess. Line the bottom of each pan with parchment paper and then spray and flour again. Set aside.
    cooking spray, all-purpose flour
  • In a stand mixer, beat the softened butter (2 sticks) with the sugar until light and fluffy (about 4 minutes), scraping down the sides when necessary.
    1 cup unsalted butter, 2 cups sugar
  • Add the eggs, one at a time, beating well after each addition.
    4 large eggs
  • Alternating flour and buttermilk, add to the mixture, starting with the flour (one-third), then half of the buttermilk, another third of the flour, the rest of the buttermilk, and then the rest of the flour. Mix until smooth. Beat in the vanilla.
    3 cups self-rising flour, 1 cup buttermilk, 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Divide the batter among the prepared pans, smoothing the tops with a spatula.
  • Bake until a toothpick inserted comes out clean, about 25 to 30 minutes. Let cool in pans for 10 minutes and then gently remove the cakes from the pans on wire racks. Let cool completely before icing.
  • Spread the frosting between the layers of the cake and on the sides. Top with pecans and then drizzle the reserved caramel over the top of the cake allowing it to flow down the sides.
    caramel frosting, ⅓ cup caramel sauce, 1½ cups pecans

Make the Caramel Frosting

  • In a large, sturdy saucepan, place the sugar over no heat.
    2 cups sugar
  • Whisk together the water and the corn syrup in a small bowl. Pour over the sugar. Use a wooden spoon to stir the sugar just enough until it has absorbed the liquid.
    ¼ cup water, 2 tablespoon light corn syrup
  • Cook over medium-high heat without stirring. As the mixture becomes thin, swirl the pan from time to time (no stirring). Continue this process until it becomes a dark amber. Use a wet pastry brush to brush down crystals that form along the edge of the pan.
  • Remove the saucepan from the heat. Stir in the chilled, cubed butter and stir until all of the butter has melted (it will bubble and foam quite a lot). Stir in 1 cup of heavy cream and continue stirring until smooth and the color of caramel. Let rest for 1 hour to cool.
    ½ cup unsalted butter, 1¼ cup heavy cream
  • Reserve about one-third a cup of the caramel for topping the cake.
  • Place the softened butter (2 sticks) in a large bowl and pour the cooled caramel over it. Use a hand mixer to blend the caramel and butter until smooth.
    1 cup unsalted butter
  • With the mixer on low, gradually add the confectioners' sugar. Continue mixing until smooth. Add a little more cream (about ¼ cup) until the frosting is spreadable. The frosting is now ready to use.
    5 cups confectioners' sugar

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You can use 2 round cake pans instead of three. You'll need to increase the bake time by about 5 to 10 minutes. You can also bake in a 9x13" dish. Increase that bake time by about 15 minutes. Check with the toothpick test to ensure the cake is done (when inserted, the toothpick will come out clean). 
After icing the cake, keep it covered, if possible. This will keep the icing and cake from drying out. 
The cake will keep on the counter (covered) for up to 5 to 7 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 1213kcal | Carbohydrates: 219g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 291mg | Sodium: 121mg | Potassium: 262mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 182g | Vitamin A: 2524IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 117mg | Iron: 1mg

Tex-Mex Pasta with Ground Beef

by 2 Comments

If you like Tex-Mex and if you like pasta, you are going to love this dish!

The flavor profile of this pasta is classic Tex-Mex. It’s creamy, and cheesy, and loaded with flavor. The pasta brings it all together. If desired, you can top it with easy homemade pico de gallo or salsa. And the only thing better than the taste is that it’s on the table in about 30 minutes!

A straight-on view of two white bowls filled with Tex-Mex pasta with colorful bell peppers and cilantro sitting nearby.

How To Make Tex-Mex Pasta with Ground Beef

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

This recipe is easy to adapt to your and your family’s likes and dislikes. If there are any of the ingredients you’re not fond of, just leave them out! Or, replace it with an ingredient you do like! Here are the ingredients for how we love to prepare the dish:

Short dried pasta – We love rigatoni, but these are great choices, too: Elbow, fusilli, penne, farfalle, cavatappi, or orecchiette.
Salt – Table, for salting the pasta water.
Ground beef – 90% lean is recommended.
Bell peppers – Red, yellow, orange, green, or a combination of them all.
Peppers – Fresh jalapeños are our favorite, but you could go with pickled, too. Serranos have a little more heat but is a great option. Remove the seeds to reduce the amount of heat.
Onion – Chopped.
Seasonings – Chili powder, ground cumin, dried oregano, cayenne, salt, and pepper.
Ro-tel – Canned diced tomatoes with green chiles. If you can’t find Ro-tel, other brands have something very similar. Or, just go with diced tomatoes, with the juice.
Beef stock – Broth or stock is perfectly fine.
Half and half – Whole milk or heavy cream can be substituted.
Cheddar cheese – Shredded, preferably from a block. Any kind of melting cheese will work, such as Monterrey Jack or Colby.
Cilantro – Fresh, chopped.
Garnishes – Any of the following: Pico de gallo, chopped tomatoes, pickled jalapeños, chopped cilantro, sour cream, salsa.

EXPERT TIP: We find that half and half provide a nice creaminess to the sauce. However, if you prefer, you can go with whole milk, and it will still be delicious. Heavy cream is fine, too, but the sauce will be more dense and luxurious.

A person pouring half and half from a small milk bottle into a skillet filled with a Tex-Mex beef mixture with chopped pepper, tomatoes, and broth.

Tips for Perfect Tex-Mex Pasta with Ground Beef

Season the Beef Well – Don’t skip any of the seasonings. If you want no spice at all, then you can omit the cayenne. Remember if you go with package taco seasoning, it includes a large amount of sodium.

Cut the Vegetables Uniformly – This helps them all cook evenly and also makes a more beautiful dish.

Choose the Right Pasta – Opt for pasta shapes that hold onto the sauce well, such as penne, fusilli, or rotini. Cook the pasta al dente according to package instructions, as it will continue to cook slightly when mixed with the hot sauce.

Add Fresh Ingredients – Just before serving, stir in fresh ingredients like chopped cilantro, diced avocado, or a squeeze of lime juice to brighten the dish. Topping with shredded cheese, sour cream, or sliced jalapeños can also enhance the Tex-Mex flair and add a creamy finish.

EXPERT TIP: Adding the cheese at the very end, just before serving, will create an extra cheesy sauce that is wonderful. Turn the heat off, then stir in the cilantro and cheese, and then serve immediately.

A person transferring shredded cheddar cheese from a glass bowl into a skillet filled with cooked rigatoni in a simmering Tex-Mex beef sauce.

How To Serve

This dish is filling and really doesn’t require any side dishes. However, rolls or biscuits are a wonderful accompaniment.

Be sure to stir the cheese in the cheese and parsley right after you take the skillet off of the heat. We serve this right from the skillet at the table.

Like any Tex-Mex dish, toppings add even more flavor. Pico de gallo, chopped cilantro, salsa, and even sour cream are all perfect additions to the dish.

An overhead view of a large stainless steel skillet filled with Tex-Mex pasta with a wooden spoon stuck into the side of it.

Other Weeknight Dinner Recipes

Busy weekdays don’t mean you can’t put a delicious and satisfying meal on the table. Here is a collection of our favorite “no fuss” scrumptious recipes:

These are all wonderful and always a huge hit with the entire family. But, in the meantime, isn’t this dish calling your name?

An overhead view of a white bowl filled with a serving of Tex-Mex past topped with chopped cilantro, tomatoes, and a couple slices of pickled jalapeño.

There are so many reasons to love this dish. You can easily adapt it to your tastes.

It’s easy to make. Leftovers are absolutely wonderful.

But, more than any other reason, it’s just so delicious and is always a hit with kids and adults.

A straight-on view of a white bowl filled with a serving of Tex-Mex pasta topped with chopped cilantro, tomatoes, and a couple of pickled jalapeño slices.

Ready to make the most yummy dinner in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a white bowl filled with a serving of Tex-Mex pasta topped with chopped cilantro, tomatoes, and a couple of pickled jalapeño slices.
Print Recipe
4 from 1 vote

Tex-Mex Pasta with Ground Beef

This dish is so easy to prepare and is always a huge hit at the dinner table. Feel free to substitute lean ground turkey to make it healthier. This recipe hits all the right notes and comes together in about 30 minutes! Kids and adults will love this!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Course: Dinner
Cuisine: American, Tex-Mex
Servings: 4
Calories: 672kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large skillet
  • 1 pot for cooking pasta

Ingredients

  • 12 oz short pasta such as rigatoni
  • 1 lb ground beef 90% lean
  • 2 cups bell peppers 2 to 3 peppers, seeded, chopped
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 jalapeño seeded and finely chopped
  • 2 teaspoon salt plus extra for pasta water
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon oregano
  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • 1 15 oz can Ro-tel undrained, see NOTES
  • ½ cup beef stock or broth
  • 1 cup half and half
  • 2 cups cheddar cheese shredded, divided
  • ¼ cup cilantro fresh, chopped, plus extra for garnish
  • pico de gallo for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Bring a pot of liberally salted water to a boil. Add the pasta, and stir occasionally while you prepare the meat sauce. Drain the pasta once it is al dente (about 1 minute short of packaging directions).
    12 oz short pasta
  • Meanwhile, add the ground beef to a large skillet over medium heat and break it up with a wooden spatula. Add the bell peppers, onion, and jalapeño. Cook until the meat is no longer pink and the vegetables are tender. Tilt the skillet and use a spoon to remove most of the rendered grease. Discard safely.
    1 lb ground beef, 2 cups bell peppers, 1 medium onion, 1 jalapeño
  • Stir in the salt (2 tsp), black pepper, chili powder, cumin, oregano, and cayenne. Cook, stirring often, for about 1 to 2 minutes.
    2 teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon chili powder, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon oregano, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • Stir in the Ro-tel (undrained), beef stock, and half and half. Bring to a simmer and then stir in the cooked pasta. Stir to combine and let simmer for another minute or so.
    1 15 oz can Ro-tel, ½ cup beef stock, 1 cup half and half
  • Remove from the heat and stir in 1¾ cup of the cheese and the cilantro. Stir until the cheese has melted. Serve at once with extra cheese, cilantro, and pico de gallo for garnish.
    2 cups cheddar cheese, ¼ cup cilantro, pico de gallo

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If you can't find Ro-tel, look for canned diced tomatoes with green chiles. If you can't find that either, just go with a 15 oz can of diced tomatoes (undrained).
Be sure not to overcook the pasta before adding to the sauce. If it's overcooked, it will break apart in the sauce.  
Leftovers are easily reheated in a skillet. Add another splash of stock/broth and/or half and half. They will keep covered in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 672kcal | Carbohydrates: 76g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 158mg | Sodium: 728mg | Potassium: 923mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 3489IU | Vitamin C: 103mg | Calcium: 535mg | Iron: 5mg

Pumpkin Waffles with Whipped Cinnamon Honey Butter

by 2 Comments

When the temperatures drop outside, it’s time to whip up some fall dishes. This is one for the record books.

For many of us, breakfast is the best meal of the day. We love pancakes and waffles for obvious reasons. These fall-inspired waffles are truly a flavor sensation. Don’t skip the whipped cinnamon honey butter. Top with warm maple syrup and chopped pecans for a 5-star breakfast that will make you a superstar.

A straight-on view of a stack of three pumpkin waffles that are topped with a dollop of whipped cinnamon honey butter, maple syrup, and chopped pecans.

How To Make Pumpkin Waffles with Whipped Cinnamon Honey Butter

The Ingredients You Will Need

None of the ingredients in this dish are hard to find, and many you may very well already have. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Flour – All-purpose.
Sugar – Granulated.
Baking powder – Check the date and make sure it hasn’t expired. This is important.
Spices – Ground cinnamon, ground ginger, allspice, nutmeg. Or, you can use pumpkin pie spice. All of these can be found in the spice section of your grocery store.
Salt – Kosher, or table.
Butter – Unsalted, chilled.
Milk – Whole.
Pumpkin purée – Not pumpkin pie filling. This can be found in the canned fruit area of most well-stocked supermarkets.
Eggs – Lightly beaten.

For the Whipped Cinnamon Honey Butter

Butter – Unsalted, room temperature.
Powdered sugar – Aka confectioner’s sugar.
Honey – Go with good quality.
Vanilla extract – Top-notch is best.
Cinnamon – Ground.
Salt – Optional (but good).

Tools Used for this Recipe

Breville Electric Waffle Maker – We love this waffle maker. It’s a little pricier than others, but the quality is superior and is reliable and long-lasting.
Electric Hand Mixer – This can be used in place of a stand mixer.

EXPERT TIP: Gradually add the flour to the wet mixture and then stir until just combined. You will still see small chunks of butter, which is what you want.

Two images with the first being a person transferring flour into a glass bowl that is filled with a pumpkin waffle batter and then the next image is the batter fully mixed together with a wire whisk.

Tips for Making Perfect Pumpkin Waffles with Whipped Cinnamon Honey Butter

Use a Variety of Spices – You can use pumpkin pie spice for this recipe and still get a good flavor. We find that using a combination of cinnamon, ginger, allspice, and nutmeg gives a deeper, more traditional flavor.

Balance the Batter – Combine dry ingredients in your food processor or a large bow, and then whisk together the wet ingredients in another. Gently mix the two together. This ensures even distribution of leavening agents and spices, resulting in light and flavorful waffles.

Preheat the Waffle Iron – Ensure your waffle iron is fully preheated before pouring in the batter. This helps achieve a crispy exterior while keeping the inside fluffy. If your waffle iron is not non-stick, then grease the waffle iron with cooking spray or oil for easy release.

Don’t forget the Toppings – To put these waffles in a league of their own, they need special toppings. The whipped cinnamon honey butter (room temperature, or slightly chilled), combined with warm maple syrup and chopped pecans, is restaurant-quality.

EXPERT TIP: Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding the batter to your waffle maker. We recommend adding just enough to fill all of the crevices. A small spatula can help you spread the batter.

A person using a metal measuring cup to transfer pumpkin waffle batter into a four chamber waffle maker.

How To Serve

Depending on the size of your waffle maker, this recipe typically will feed four people. We get about 5 large waffles from one batch. If you want to serve two waffles per serving (for 4 people), then make the first batch and keep the waffles warm in a low-temperature oven (225°F) until the next batch is ready.

As mentioned, you can also use this batter to make pancakes.

The whipped cinnamon honey butter can be made several days in advance and will keep just fine in a container on the counter.

Be sure to have plenty of warm maple syrup and chopped pecans at the table so guests can add more if desired.

A person pouring pure maple syrup from a small white pitcher over a pile of pumpkin waffles with whipped cinnamon honey waffles.

Other Classic Breakfast Recipes to Try

When breakfast is done right, there’s nothing much better. Here is a collection of recipes that will delight all of the breakfast lovers in your family.

These are all amazing and always a hit with family and friends. But, in the meantime, isn’t this plate full of deliciousness calling your name?

An overhead view of a white plate that is filled with a stack of pumpkin waffles with whipped cinnamon honey butter and a small pumpkin and cup of coffee nearby.

Waffles are wonderful any time of the year, and that includes pumpkin waffles.

But, when the leaves are changing colors and the temperatures are dropping, this breakfast is absolute fall perfection.

It’s perfect for an intimate weekend breakfast with a loved one, but it’s also festive; it is ideal for serving guests, especially during the holiday season.

Every bite is elevated and yet pure comfort. You’ll feel like you’re having a spectacular breakfast at one of the best bed and breakfasts in the world. It’s really that good!

A close-up view a plate of pumpkin waffles with whipped cinnamon honey butter that have been partially eaten with a fork sitting on the plate in front of the waffles.

Ready to make the best fall breakfast this side of Vermont? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a stack of three pumpkin waffles that are topped with a dollop of whipped cinnamon honey butter, maple syrup, and chopped pecans.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Pumpkin Waffles with Whipped Cinnamon Honey Butter

Pumpkin waffles are delicious and the perfect fall breakfast comfort food. The whipped cinnamon honey butter can be made several days in advance. Be sure to serve with warmed pure maple syrup and chopped pecans. It all comes together to make a truly memorable breakfast that you'll want to make time and time again. Especially during the holiday season!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time14 minutes
Total Time34 minutes
Course: Breakfast / Brunch
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 675kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

For the Whipped Cinnamon Honey Butter

  • ½ cup unsalted butter room temperature
  • ¼ cup powdered sugar
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

For the Pumpkin Pancakes

  • 2¼ cups all-purpose flour
  • ⅓ cup sugar
  • 2 tablespoon baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground ginger
  • ½ teaspoon allspice
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 5 tablespoon unsalted butter cubed and chilled
  • 1½ cups whole milk
  • ¾ cup pumpkin purée not pumpkin pie filling
  • 2 large eggs lightly beaten
  • cooking spray if needed (for waffle iron)
  • whipped cinnamon honey butter for serving, recipe below
  • maple syrup for serving
  • 1 cup chopped pecans for serving (optional)

Instructions

Make the Whipped Cinnamon Honey Butter

  • Add all of the butter ingredients to a large sturdy bowl. Use a hand mixer to beat until combined and fluffy. Transfer to a bowl and keep at room temperature until ready to serve. You can chill the butter for about 10 minutes before serving to help get a more solid scoop.
    ½ cup unsalted butter, ¼ cup powdered sugar, 1 tablespoon honey, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Make the Pumpkin Waffles

  • Place the flour, sugar, baking powder, cinnamon, ginger, allspice, nutmeg, and salt in your food processor and pulse to combine.
    2¼ cups all-purpose flour, ⅓ cup sugar, 2 tablespoon baking powder, 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon ground ginger, ½ teaspoon allspice, ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Add the cubed butter and pulse about 10 more times, until the butter resembles small peas.
    5 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the milk, pumpkin purée, and eggs. Slowly stir in the flour/butter mixture and continue stirring until a batter forms (there will be visible chunks of butter).
    1½ cups whole milk, ¾ cup pumpkin purée, 2 large eggs
  • If your waffle iron is not nonstick, spray it with cooking spray or use a paper towel to apply a little vegetable oil. Preheat the waffle iron to your desired setting.
    cooking spray
  • Ladle enough of the batter over the grid to just fill all of the crevices. Lower the lid and cook until golden brown, 4 to 7 minutes (depending on the size of your waffle iron).
  • Serve at once with a dollop of whipped cinnamon honey butter on top, along with warmed maple syrup and chopped pecans, if using.
    whipped cinnamon honey butter, maple syrup, 1 cup chopped pecans

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You can use pumpkin pie spice in place of the spices. You'll need 1¾ tsp. We recommend the individual spices, but the pumpkin pie spice is good, too. 
The recipe can easily be doubled. Preheat your oven to 225°F, and after you've made each batch of waffles, place them in the oven until ready to serve. 
The whipped butter can be made several days in advance. Keep covered on the counter.  The waffles can be prepared up to several hours in advance of serving. Reheat them in a 225°F (covered) oven until warm. 

Nutrition

Calories: 675kcal | Carbohydrates: 67g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 165mg | Sodium: 376mg | Potassium: 1087mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 8599IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 455mg | Iron: 6mg

Homemade Chicken and Dumplings

by 20 Comments

We can safely say this soup is near perfection and is truly the ultimate comfort food.

There are a few critical components that make this soup so stellar. The first is the homemade chicken broth. This can be done far in advance. Roasting the chicken for the soup is key, too. And, then, of course, the dumplings bring it all together. Make the broth and roast the chicken in advance, and then the soup comes together in about 30 to 40 minutes!

An overhead view of a white soup bowl that is filled with homemade chicken and dumplings including sautéed carrots and celery.

How To Make Homemade Chicken and Dumplings.

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients for this soup are humble and not hard to come by. This is true for making the broth, too. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Chicken broth – Homemade chicken broth or stock brings this soup to another level. You can also simmer a whole chicken in water with vegetables and herbs. See NOTES.
Roasted chicken – You can substitute rotisserie chicken from the supermarket and still get excellent results.
Mirepoix – Onion, celery, and carrots chopped (or sliced) into a uniform size. Fresh is definitely best. We don’t recommend canned vegetables.
Butter – Unsalted.
Flour – All-purpose.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper.

For the Dumplings

Flour – All-purpose.
Baking powder – Check the date. Don’t use it if past the ‘best used’ by date.
Parsley – Fresh, chopped. Fresh is recommended.
Butter – Cubed and chilled.
Milk – Whole is best.
Egg – Lightly beaten.
Salt – Kosher is excellent.

EXPERT TIP: Roasting a couple of bone-in, skin-on chicken breasts with a little olive oil, salt, and pepper will give you very tender and flavorful chicken. This can be done up to several days in advance of preparing the soup.

A person dumping shredded roasted chicken from a glass bowl into a large Dutch oven that is filled with a simmering chicken broth.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Chicken and Dumplings

Make the Chicken Broth – We can’t stress this enough. The homemade chicken broth is easy to make; it just takes about 4 hours, but requires very little attention. Just stir every now and then. And then allow the broth to cool in the fridge overnight. The results are amazing.

Roast the Chicken for Depth – Roast your chicken until golden brown and juicy, then shred or chop the meat into bite-sized pieces. The roasting process adds a rich flavor that enhances the overall dish, making it more satisfying.

Prepare the Dumpling Dough Properly – For fluffy dumplings, mix until just combined—overmixing can lead to tough dumplings. Right as the dough comes together, knead it a few times until it is a solid (but soft) mass. Allow the dough to rest for a few minutes before dropping it into the simmering broth.

Simmer the Dumplings Gently – Once you add the dumplings to the simmering broth, cover the pot and cook them without lifting the lid for about 15-20 minutes. This steaming method ensures the dumplings cook through while remaining light and fluffy. Avoid stirring during this time to maintain their shape.

Two images with the first being a person bringing together a very loose and shaggy dough in a shallow bowl and then an image of the dough after it has formed a ball.

How To Serve

The soup can be served right after the dumplings are plump and fully cooked.

It makes for an amazingly delicious lunch serving. For a wonderful dinner, make grilled cheese sandwiches for everyone to dunk into the broth as they are eating their soup.

Leftovers heat beautifully on the stove. Feel free to add more broth (store-bought is fine) when re-heating.

EXPERT TIP: Remember that the dumpling dough has baking powder, which will make the dumplings increase in size as they cook. Drop the dough in by spoonfuls, but not too big, unless you like extra-large dumplings.

A person using a silver spoon to transfer uncooked dumplings dough into a Dutch oven filled with chicken broth, carrots, and other mounds of dough.

Other Classic Broth-Based Soups to Try

There is something just so comforting about soup with homemade broth or stock as the foundation for the other ingredients. Here are some of our favorite soups with stock or broth that we are certain you and your loved ones will love, too;

These are all wonderful soups and are always a huge hit when served to loved ones. But, in the meantime, isn’t the pot of yumminess calling your name?

An overhead view of a large oval Dutch oven that is filled with homemade chicken and dumplings soup.

Every time we prepare this soup, we look at each other after that first bite, and say something along the lines of: “This is the best soup in the world!”

Of course, you would still get yummy results if you didn’t make the stock from scratch, but we promise you, it takes the soup from good to out-of-this-world!

It is just so heart-warming and perfect for the belly and the soul, especially when the temperatures start to drop outside. Soup perfection!

A close-up view of a white soup bowl that is filled with homemade chicken and dumplings soup that has been garnished with chopped fresh parsley.

Ready to make one of the most comforting soups of all time, in the comfort of your own kitchen? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it to Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a white soup bowl that is filled with homemade chicken and dumplings including sautéed carrots and celery.
Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Homemade Chicken and Dumplings

Homemade chicken and dumplings is about as comforting a soup as you will ever find. Make the chicken broth and roast the chicken in advance and then the soup comes together in about 30 to 40 minutes. Off-the-charts delicious!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Preparing Broth and Roasted Chicken12 hours
Total Time12 hours 50 minutes
Course: Appetizer, Soup
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8 people
Calories: 299kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Large pot, such as a Dutch oven

Ingredients

Do Ahead - Chicken Stock and Roasted Chicken

  • chicken broth
  • 2 large chicken breasts bone-in, skin on
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • salt and pepper

For the Soup

  • 7 cups chicken broth
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 medium onion chopped, about 1 cup
  • 2 stalks celery sliced, about 1 cup
  • 2 medium carrots peeled and thinly sliced, about 1 cup
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For the Dumplings

  • 1½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 3 teaspoon baking powder
  • 2 tablespoon flat-leaf parsley chopped, plus extra for garnish (if desired)
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoon butter unsalted, cut into small pieces and chilled
  • ½ cup milk whole
  • 1 egg lightly beaten

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Prepare the chicken broth (link in Ingredients). Chill in the fridge, preferably overnight. The next morning, use a spoon to remove the congealed fat on the surface of the broth.
    chicken broth
  • To roast the chicken, preheat your oven to 350°F.
  • Brush the breasts with olive oil, and then liberally season with salt and pepper. Place the chicken on a baking sheet lined with a baking rack. Roast in the oven until an internal temperature of 165°F is reached. Remove from oven and let rest until cool enough to handle.
    2 large chicken breasts, 1 tablespoon olive oil, salt and pepper
  • Remove the skin from the breasts and then use your fingers to pull the meat from the bones. Roughly chop the chicken and set aside until ready to use.

Prepare the Soup

  • Heat the chicken broth in a pot (or stock pan) until heated through.
    7 cups chicken broth
  • Melt the butter over medium heat in a Dutch oven or pot.
    4 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Add the onion, celery, and carrots. Cook, stirring often until tender, about 6 to 8 minutes.
    1 medium onion, 2 stalks celery, 2 medium carrots
  • Add the flour and stir for 1 to 2 minutes.
    ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • Add the heated chicken broth and stir until slightly thickened, about 5 minutes. Add the roasted chicken and season with salt (1½ tsp) and pepper (½ tsp).
    1½ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Let simmer gently as you make the dumplings.

Make the Dumplings

  • In a large bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, parsley, and ½ teaspoon of salt.
    1½ cups all-purpose flour, 3 teaspoon baking powder, 2 tablespoon flat-leaf parsley, ½ teaspoon salt
  • Add the cubed butter, and, using a pastry cutter, or the ends of two forks, work the butter into the dry ingredients until the mixture has the texture of small peas.
    2 tablespoon butter
  • Add the milk and egg, and then use a fork to incorporate until a batter just comes together. Use the heel of your hands to gently knead the dough until a soft ball is formed.
    ½ cup milk, 1 egg
  • Drop heaping spoonfuls (roughly the size of a golf ball) of the dough into the simmering soup.
  • Reduce the heat to low, cover, and cook until the dumplings are fluffy...about 15 minutes. Serve at once, or cover, and serve within 30 minutes. Garnish with additional chopped parsley, if desired.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Though it's not as deeply flavorful as the homemade chicken stock, you can place a whole chicken in a stock pan and cover it with water. Add a large quartered onion, a peeled and roughly chopped carrot, and roughly chopped two stalks of celery. Bring to a simmer and lower the heat to medium-low for about 2 to 2½ hours. Let cool. You can use the broth for the stock and shred the chicken for the chicken meat. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. Reheat on the stove over medium heat until heated through. 
The finished soup can be frozen for up to two months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 299kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 85mg | Sodium: 1468mg | Potassium: 562mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 3016IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 119mg | Iron: 2mg

POST UPDATE NOTE: This recipe was originally published March, 2014, but has been updated with improvements to the recipe, new tips and photography, and a fabulouse new video in October, 2024!

Homemade Apple Fritters

by 1 Comment

If you love apples and if you love lightly fried sweet treats, these gems are for you.

There is just something so comforting about these light and airy treats. They are nothing short of amazing when served warm, but they are addictively delicious even at room temperature. These give our homemade cinnamon rolls a run for the money, and they could not be easier to prepare!

An overhead view of a pile of homemade apple fritters resting on a white circular serving platter.

How To Make Homemade Apple Fritters

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients for these fritters are very straightforward and many you’ll probably already have on hand. Here’s what you’ll need to grab:

Flour – All-purpose.
Baking powder – Check the date, and make sure it’s not too old.
Cinnamon – Quality ground cinnamon makes a big difference.
Salt – We use recommend Kosher.
Milk – Whole.
Egg – Lightly beaten.
Butter – Unsalted, melted.
Cubed apple – Go with your favorite. We love Honeycrisp and Red delicious. But, really, any variety will work.
Oil – Vegetable is perfect for frying.
Powdered sugar – Also known as ‘confectioners’ sugar.
Cider – Or apple juice, or just water.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to peel the apple and core it. Then use a sharp knife to cut it into small, bite-sized cubes. It’s okay if they’re a little misshapen, but they should all be similar in size so they cook evenly. One apple typically will give you a cup of cubed apples.

A person transferring cubed chunks of fresh apple into a large glass bowl filled with an apple fritters batter.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Apple Fritters

Don’t Over-mix the Batter – The fritters batter will feel thick. This is normal. Stir until just combined. Stirring too much, or over-beating the batter will result in dense fritters.

Fry at the Correct Temperature – Heat oil in a deep fryer or heavy skillet to about 350°F (175°C) for frying. This temperature ensures that the fritters cook through without absorbing too much oil, resulting in a crispy exterior and fluffy interior. Fry in small batches to prevent overcrowding.

Don’t Forget the Glaze – The apple cider glaze adds a wonderful depth of flavor. If you have the time, you can simmer the cider over medium heat until it thickens a bit, then combine it with powdered sugar until the consistency of icing. Simmering is not 100% necessary, we usually just add enough cider to the sugar to reach the right consistency.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to fry the fritters until they are a deep golden brown. Don’t add too much batter to the oil, otherwise, the fritters will be too big and possibly not cook all the way through. Consider frying a test fritter first, and then check the center before frying the rest. Don’t have your oil too hot, either. 350°F is perfect.

Two images with the first being a spoonful of apple fritters dough being dropped into a skillet filled with hot oil and then an image of the fried fritter being lifted from the oil with a metal spider.

How To Serve

We have to say that there is nothing much better than a warm apple fritter.

Allowing them to rest for at least 15 minutes after they’ve been glazed helps the glaze set and creates that classic coating that we all love so much.

These are perfect for a holiday breakfast or brunch, but they are also amazing as a dessert served with homemade vanilla ice cream!

They are also amazing when dunked into a mug of deliciously brewed coffee. This is a sweet treat lover’s dream come true!

A person lifting a freshly fried homemade apple fritter from a bowl filled with cider glaze with some of the glaze dripping from the fritter.

Other Delicious Sweet Breakfast Recipes to Try

We love all kinds of pastries, and these are some of our absolute favorites. We’re certain you and your loved ones as much as we do!

These are all amazing and instant family favorites. But, in the meantime, aren’t these gems calling your name?

A close-up view of a collection of homemade apple fritters resting on a baking rack with drips of cider glaze dripping from the freshly fried fritters.

These lightly fried balls of apple and cinnamon yumminess conjure wonderful memories for so many of us.

We loved seeing them piled high under a glass dome at diners across the country.

But, trust us, there is nothing better than when you bite into one that was made from scratch, in your very own kitchen.

Every bite is fried fruit dough perfection!

A close-up view of an apple fritter that has been broken in half so the interior is visible including small chunks of cubed apples.

Ready to make the best fritter this side of Washington State? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a pile of homemade apple fritters resting on a white circular serving platter.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Homemade Apple Fritters

These lightly fried gems are delicious all year long, but they are extra special during the fall months when apples are in season. These are delicious whne served warm or at room temperature.
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time12 minutes
Resting time5 minutes
Total Time37 minutes
Course: Breakfast / Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 353kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Sturdy skillet for frying
  • Thermometer for checking oil temperature
  • Spider or metal spatula

Ingredients

  • vegetable oil for frying
  • 1¾ cups all-purpose flour
  • ½ cup sugar
  • 2 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter melted
  • 1½ cups apple peeled, cored, and cubed
  • 1 cup confectioner's sugar
  • 2 tablespoon apple cider or more, as needed

Instructions

  • Add enough oil to a large sturdy skillet to fill it about half way. The oil should be at least an inch deep, but at least an inch of the side of the skillet should remain without oil. Heat the oil to 350°F.
    vegetable oil
  • In a medium-sized bowl, sift together the flour, sugar, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt. Set aside.
    1¾ cups all-purpose flour, ½ cup sugar, 2 teaspoon baking powder, ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the milk, egg, and melted butter (cooled a bit) until combined.
    ½ cup whole milk, 1 large egg, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Gradually add the flour mixture to the wet mixture, stirring gently with a large wooden spoon or spatula. Continue adding the flour mixture until fully combined. Gently fold in the cubed apples.
    1½ cups apple
  • Working in batches, carefully drop a spoonful of dough into the hot oil. Repeat until you've added about 4 to 5 fritters. Fry until golden, flipping halfway through, usually about 3 to 4 minutes. Use a spider or metal spatula to lift the fritters from the oil and onto a board lined with paper towels. Repeat with the remaining dough.
  • Add the confectioner's sugar to a wide, shallow bowl. Add the apple cider and stir until combined and the consistency is like heavy cream. If too thick, add a little more cider, if too thin, add a little more sugar.
    1 cup confectioner's sugar, 2 tablespoon apple cider
  • One by one, dip the tops of each fritter into the glaze. Place the fritter on a baking rack and let rest for 5 minutes. If you have extra glaze, dip the fritters a second time. Serve at once or store in an air-tight container for up to 5 days.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Use whatever is your favorite apple. We used Honeycrisp, but any variety will work. Typically, you'll need just 1 apple (peeled, cored, and cubed) for this recipe. 
These will keep on the counter (covered) for up to a week. Reheat in the microwave, if desired, or serve at room temperature. 

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 71g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 217mg | Potassium: 257mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 41g | Vitamin A: 212IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 98mg | Iron: 2mg

Smoked St. Louis-Style Ribs

by Leave a Comment

There are ribs, and then there are these.

If you want your ribs to taste like they could be entered into a pit master competition, then this is the recipe for you. The 3-2-1 guide is just that: a guide. Use our best-ever pork rub and homemade BBQ sauce for a truly magical BBQ culinary experience. You don’t even have to have a smoker, you can do them in the oven!

An overhead view of a rack of smoked St. Louis-style ribs that have been partially cut up with a bowl of homemade barbecue sauce nearby.

How To Make Smoked St. Louis-Style Ribs

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

We encourage you to go the distance and make the rub and BBQ sauce from scratch. It’s easier than you might think and really makes a big difference. But, no matter what, these ribs are the bomb! Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

The Tools You Will Need

Smoker – We use our Smokin’Tex electric smoker and have amazing results. Click the link to receive a 10% discount on all purchases using code: LOON10.
Wood chips – We recommend Hickory, but you can also go with Cherry, Mesquite, Hickory, Pecan, and Oak.

The Ingredients You Will Need

Ribs – St. Louis-style ribs are a type of spare ribs. You can also go with center-cut ribs. These can be found in the meat department of most supermarkets, or at your local meat market.
Salt – We prefer coarse Kosher salt for the dry salt brine.
Mustard – Standard yellow mustard works perfectly. Dijon will work, but it will impart some Dijon flavor to the final flavor profile.
Rub – Homemade is best, but, purchased will work, too. Go with your favorite. Seek out a good quality rub that is suited for pork.
BBQ Sauce – Homemade is best, but purchased will work, too. You know the story: Seek out a top-notch sauce. You can even purchase some from your local BBQ joint.

EXPERT TIP: Allowing the ribs to chill in the fridge with a dry salt brine helps to make the rib meat juicy and tender. Applying a layer of mustard will simply allow the rub to adhere to the ribs, you won’t get a mustard taste at all if you stick with plain yellow mustard.

A person sprinkling pork rub over the top of a rack of uncooked St. Louis-style ribs that have a layer of yellow mustard smeared all over the ribs.

Tips for Making Perfect Smoked St. Louis-Style Ribs

Don’t Skip the Salt Brine – Adding salt to the ribs all over and then letting them chill in the fridge for a minimum of an hour produces tender, juicy ribs. Two hours is even better. You can also let them chill overnight, but not longer.

Maintain Consistent Temperature – Set your electric smoker to a steady temperature of around 225°F (107°C) for the entire cooking process. This low-and-slow method is crucial for breaking down the connective tissues in the ribs, resulting in tender meat.

Follow the 3-2-1 Technique – For the 3-2-1 method, smoke the ribs for almost 3 hours unwrapped, allowing them to absorb the smoke flavor. Then, wrap them tightly in foil and cook for close to another 2 hours, which helps tenderize the meat. Finally, unwrap the ribs and brush them with your homemade BBQ sauce, smoking for an additional 45 minutes to 1 hour to set the sauce and create a nice glaze.

Rest Before Serving – Once the ribs are done, let them rest for about 10-15 minutes before slicing. This allows the juices to redistribute throughout the meat, ensuring each bite is juicy and flavorful. Serve with extra BBQ sauce on the side for dipping!

EXPERT TIP: Before wrapping the ribs in the foil, place 4 to 5 pallets of butter on the foil and then liberally sprinkle brown sugar over the butter. Be sure to place the ribs meat-side down over the butter, and then fold the foil tightly (but gently). This adds flavor and helps to tenderize the rib meat.

Two images with the first being a person sprinkling brown sugar over the tops of pads of butter that are on a sheet of foil and then a partially cooked rack of ribs resting on the butter and sugar.

How To Serve

Sometimes we throw the ribs under the broiler for about 1 minute. This caramelizes the BBQ sauce and adds a nice depth of flavor. But, honestly, there is so much flavor going on, that it’s not really necessary.

Have a large sharp knife ready to cut the ribs into individual ribs, or cut them into half slabs.

Be sure to have plenty of extra BBQ sauce on hand. White bread slices and pickles are a must for serving.

We love to serve these ribs alongside our macaroni and cheese, Southern baked beans, coleslaw, and slow-cooker corn on the cob for the ultimate BBQ feast!

EXPERT TIP: For the final stage of the 3-2-1 technique, you’ll want to liberally apply a layer of BBQ sauce on the top of the ribs. You can bring them into your kitchen to do this, or, very carefully apply the sauce out at the smoker.

An overhead view of a rack of ribs that are resting on a rack in an electric smoker and are being brushed with BBQ sauce.

Other Classic BBQ Recipes to Try

Being born and raised in the Lone Star State, we’ve had some pretty amazing BBQ over the years. It can be a challenge to re-create the classics at home. But, we’ve got the recipes and techniques to help you get real close. In some cases, maybe even better! Here are some of our absolute favorites that we are certain you and your family will love, too!

These are all amazing and classic, but, in the meantime, are these ribs calling your name?

A straight-on view of a rack of smoked St. Louis-style ribs resting on a wooden cutting board with a large sharp knife next to it.

Folks, these ribs are the real deal.

You will be hard-pressed to find any BBQ joint that can top these gems.

Smoking adds the quintessential BBQ flavor, but, you could do this same technique in your oven or on your grill. Just maintain a steady low heat of 225°F.

These produce a juicy, flavorful rib that is out of this world.

A person holding a single smoked St. Louis-style rib that has had homemade barbecue sauce brushed over the top of it.

Ready to make the best ribs this side of Memphis? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a rack of smoked St. Louis-style ribs that have been partially cut up with a bowl of homemade barbecue sauce nearby.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Smoked St. Louis-Style Ribs

These ribs are the real deal. If you can, make the pork rub and BBQ sauce from scratch. Click the links for authentic recipes. We call this the 3-2-1 technique, but, in reality, it's more of the 2:45-1:45-0:45 technique. But, you get the gist. If you don't have a smoker, you can follow this recipe on the grill (maintain a 225°F temperature) or in the oven at 225°F.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time5 hours 15 minutes
Resting time10 minutes
Total Time5 hours 40 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American / BBQ
Servings: 4
Calories: 658kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 racks St. Louis-style ribs spare ribs
  • Kosher salt
  • 1 cup yellow mustard
  • 1 cup pork rub
  • 8 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 cup brown sugar preferably dark
  • 1½ cups BBQ sauce plus extra for serving

Instructions

  • Prep your smoker with the wood chips. Place a pan of water on the lower rack.
  • Liberally salt the ribs all over with salt. Place on a smoker rack (or racks) and place in the fridge (on a baking pan or pans) for 1 to 2 hours, or overnight.
    2 racks St. Louis-style ribs, Kosher salt
  • Remove the ribs from the fridge and slather mustard all over the tops and bottoms of the ribs. Liberally sprinkle the rub all over the ribs (they should be fully coated).
    1 cup yellow mustard, 1 cup pork rub
  • Place the ribs in the smoker and turn the heat to 225°F. Smoke for 2 hours and 45 minutes.
  • Tear off two pieces of foil that are large enough to wrap up each rack of ribs. Place four pads of butter on each piece of foil. Sprinkle a half cup of the brown sugar over the butter on each rack (total of 1 cup of sugar).
    8 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 cup brown sugar
  • Carefully bring the ribs from the smoker and place them (meat side down) on top of the butter. Bring the sides of the foil up around the ribs and gently make a seal on the top and the sides. Return the ribs to the smoker for another 1 hour and 45 minutes.
  • Make the BBQ sauce at this point, if you haven't already done so.
  • Bring the ribs in foil into the kitchen and place them on a baking sheet. Carefully remove the foil and any accumulated juices and melted butter. Place the ribs, meat side up, back on the grates. Liberally brush BBQ over the tops of the ribs. Return the ribs to the smoker for another 45 minutes.
    1½ cups BBQ sauce
  • Remove the ribs and let rest for 10 minutes before slicing. Serve at once with extra BBQ sauce for passing at the table.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You can substitute baby back ribs. Ask your butcher to remove the membrane on the bottom side of the ribs. Take off an additional 30 minutes of cooking for each stage.
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. Reheat in a low-temperature oven (225°F) until heated through. 

Nutrition

Calories: 658kcal | Carbohydrates: 140g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 724mg | Potassium: 827mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 65g | Vitamin A: 2541IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 716mg | Iron: 23mg

Best Pork Rub

by 3 Comments

Best Pork Rub enhances the flavor of your favorite pork dish. Including Italian-style pork chops, juicy pork tenderloin, classic pulled pork, and even smoked pork brisket. The rub doesn’t outshine the pork meat but complements it. Perfect for ribs, too! Whip up a batch (or two) and keep it in a sealed jar for months!

A small white bowl filled with best pork rub with a spoon inserted into the midle of it.

🐷 The Ingredients

The ingredients for homemade pork rub are likely already in your pantry, yet their combination creates an incredible flavor enhancer that elevates your pork dishes to a whole new level.

The ingredients for pork rub arranged on a black marble surface including sugar, paprika, onion and garlic powders, brown sugar, and seasonings.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make the Best Pork Rub

A person pouring granulated sugar into a bowl with brown sugar already in it
  1. Step 1: Pour the granulated sugar and dark brown sugar into a glass bowl.
A person dumping garlic powder into a glass bowl that contains onion powder, paprika, brown sugar, and granulated sugar.
  1. Step 2: Add the onion powder and garlic powder.
A person dumping ground black pepper from a small metal bowl into a glass bowl filled with spices including garlic powder, onion powder, paprika, and sugar.
  1. Step 3: Add the black pepper.
A person dumping ground ginger from a small metal bowl as well as dried rosemary from a small white bowl into a glass bowl filled with dried spices for pork rub.
  1. Step 4: Add the ground ginger and dried rosemary.
A person using a fork to stir together the dried spices for best pork rub in a glass bowl.
  1. Step 5: Use a fork to mix the spices until fully combined.
A small glass jar filled to the top with best pork rub.
  1. Step 6: Store in a jar with a tight-fitting lid for 1 to 2 months.

Expert Tip

Note that this rub does not contain any salt. In most cases, we recommend salting the pork liberally and chilling for at least an hour (even better overnight) before applying the rub.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

How long will homemade pork rub keep?

Store it in a jar (or container) with a tight-fitting lid, and it will keep (unrefrigerated) for 2 months.

How do I get pork rub to adhere to the meat?

You can rub a neutral oil, such as vegetable or canola, all over the meat and then apply the pork rub. Our favorite method is to smear yellow mustard over the pork and then apply the rub. The mustard does not impart flavor.

Can I use the pork rub on other meats?

Absolutely! While it’s specifically designed for pork, this versatile rub works wonderfully on other meats like chicken, beef, and even vegetables, adding a delicious flavor to any dish.

A person holding a small pile of pork rub in his fingers over a bowl of the rub.

🔥 Other BBQ Rubs and Condiments

This rub is the real deal and will elevate your pork dishes to culinary greatness!

When you use the rub, be sure to take a photo of the finished dish, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A small glass jar filled to the top with best pork rub.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Best Pork Rub

This pork rub will elevate all of your favorite pork recipes. Liberally apply to pork chops or roasts and then cook. There is no salt in this rub, so you can apply as much as you want. Keep stored in a jar with a lid for months.
Prep Time15 minutes
Total Time15 minutes
Course: Rub
Cuisine: BBQ
Servings: 12
Calories: 60kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • ⅓ cup dark brown sugar
  • ⅓ cup sugar
  • ¼ cup paprika
  • 2 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 tablespoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon ground ginger
  • 1 tablespoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon rosemary dried

Instructions

  • Mix all of the ingredients together in a medium bowl. Break up any clumps of sugar with your fingers or a fork.
    ⅓ cup dark brown sugar, ⅓ cup sugar, ¼ cup paprika, 2 tablespoon garlic powder, 1 tablespoon black pepper, 1 tablespoon ground ginger, 1 tablespoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon rosemary
  • Store in a jar with a lid for up to 2 to 3 months.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
Light brown sugar can be substituted for dark brown sugar. 
This rub has no salt in it. You’ll need to season your meat before applying the rub. 

Nutrition

Calories: 60kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.05g | Sodium: 5mg | Potassium: 93mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 1111IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

Homemade Oatmeal Raisin Cookies

by 1 Comment

There is just something special about a plate filled with homemade cookies. And these cookies are about as good as they come.

Soft, warm, buttery, and loaded with tender oats and raisins make this one of the most beloved cookies of all time. Go with quality ingredients, and you and your family will be thrilled with the results. They also make insanely good ice cream cookie sandwiches with our homemade vanilla ice cream!

A straight-on view of four homemade oatmeal cookies stacked on top of each other on a piece of parchment paper with other similar cookies nearby.

How To Make Homemade Oatmeal Raisin Cookies

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As you would expect, the ingredients you will need for these cookies are easy to find, and many you’ll probably already have in your pantry. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Flour – All-purpose.
Cinnamon – Ground. Quality makes a difference in the final taste.
Baking soda – Check the date. If it’s years old, purchase some new.
Salt – Kosher is what we recommend.
Butter – Unsalted, and at room temperature. Again, quality makes a difference.
Brown sugar – Light or dark.
Sugar – Granulated.
Eggs – Fresh is best.
Vanilla extract – Quality always makes a difference.
Oats – Old-fashioned, or rolled oats. Don’t go with steel cut.
Raisins – Check the date. They should be plump and juicy.

A person getting ready to dump a bowl of old-fashioned oats and another bowl of raisins into a third bowl filled with a cookie batter.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Oatmeal Raisin Cookies

Use Old-Fashioned Oats – For the best texture, opt for old-fashioned rolled oats instead of quick oats. They provide a heartier chew and help maintain the structure of the cookies, giving them that classic oatmeal cookie texture.

Soak the Raisins (Optional) – To enhance the flavor and texture of the raisins, soak them in warm water for about 10-15 minutes before adding them to the dough. This will plump them up and prevent them from drying out during baking.

Don’t Overbake – Keep a close eye on the cookies as they bake, and remove them from the oven when the edges are golden brown but the centers still look slightly underbaked. They will continue to firm up as they cool on the baking sheet, ensuring a soft and chewy texture.

EXPERT TIP: Use a spoon or tablespoon to dole out the dough onto the parchment-lined baking sheets. Try to keep them uniform in size so they will all bake evenly. Remember, they will flatten somewhat as they bake, so give about an inch (or so) for each ball of cookie dough.

A person using his finger to push a tablespoon of oatmeal raisin cookie dough onto a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.

Other Classic Cookie Recipes to Try

Everyone loves cookies, especially when they are homemade! Here is a collection of some of our favorites that we are certain you and your family will love, too!

These are all amazing, without a doubt! But, in the meantime, aren’t these classic cookies calling your name?

An overhead view of a circular white platter filled with a pile of homemade oatmeal raisin cookies.

These cookies have bringing smiles to families for generations. And for good reason.

They are delicious! Served warm or at room temperature, they are always a beloved treat.

They also make a wonderful gift! Make a double batch, wrap in festive plastic with twine, and you will be the hit of the town!

Chewy, moist, and exploding with the classic flavor. The best!

A person holding up a homemade oatmeal raisin cookie that has split in half with the interior of the cookie revealed.

Ready to make the best cookie on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of four homemade oatmeal cookies stacked on top of each other on a piece of parchment paper with other similar cookies nearby.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Homemade Oatmeal Raisin Cookies

Oatmeal Raisin Cookies have been loved by families for generations. When you make them from scratch, they are about as good a cookie as you will find. And they are so easy to prepare!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Resting time10 minutes
Total Time40 minutes
Course: Dessert / Snack
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 491kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Electric hand-mixer or stand mixer
  • Parchment paper
  • 2 baking sheets with at least one baking rack

Ingredients

  • 1½ cups all-purpose flour
  • 2 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 8 tablespoon unsalted butter room temperature, 1 stick
  • 1 cup brown sugar light or dark
  • ½ cup sugar
  • 2 large eggs
  • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 2 cups old-fashioned oats
  • 1 cup raisins

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
  • In a medium-sized bowl, sift together the flour, cinnamon, baking powder, and salt. Set aside.
    1½ cups all-purpose flour, 2 teaspoon ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon baking powder, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • In a large bowl and with an electric mixer (or in a stand mixer), beat together the soft butter with both sugars on medium-high speed until fully combined, about 1 minute. Scrape down the sides and beat for another minute.
    8 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 cup brown sugar, ½ cup sugar
  • With the mixer running, add the eggs, one at a time, and then the vanilla. Reduce the speed and slowly add the flour mixture until incorporated.
    2 large eggs, 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Use a large wooden spoon or spatula to fold in the oats and the raisins.
    2 cups old-fashioned oats, 1 cup raisins
  • Drop about 1 tablespoon of dough onto the prepared baking sheets, spacing them about 1 inch apart. Depending on the size of your cookies, you'll get between 24 and 36 cookies. (you may need to bake another batch once the first two are done).
  • Bake the cookies until golden brown, about 15 minutes, switching the sheets halfway through. Let the cookies cool on the baking sheets for about 10 minutes, and then transfer to wire racks to cool.
  • Store in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 1 week.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
As ovens do vary, keep an eye on the cookies as they are baking. If they are getting dark around the edges, they are most likely ready. However, resist opening and closing the oven door too much, as all the heat escapes.
The cookies will flatten a little more as they cool. 
 

Nutrition

Calories: 491kcal | Carbohydrates: 86g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 77mg | Sodium: 180mg | Potassium: 360mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 40g | Vitamin A: 419IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 79mg | Iron: 3mg

Nashville Hot Chicken

by Leave a Comment

If you like things a little spicy, this dish is for you.

This dish has become iconic in its hometown of Nashville. Perfectly fried chicken that has been tenderized in a seasoned buttermilk marinade and then fried to perfection with a flavorful and extra-crispy skin. And then finally bathed in the classic Nashville hot oil sauce. Serve with mashed potatoes for a perfect meal.

An overhead view of two pieces of Nashville hot chicken resting on slices of white bread with dill pickle slices scattered around all in a paper-lined basket.

How To Make Nashville Hot Chicken

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

You will see there are three main components when making hot chicken: the marinade, the seasoned flour, and then the hot oil. Many of the ingredients used to create the flavor profile are used throughout these main components. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Chicken – Bone-in, skin-on is a must. We use legs and thighs but go with your favorites. Remember that smaller pieces (wings) cook faster than larger pieces (breasts).
Buttermilk – Whole or low-fat are both great options.
Cayenne – This is what delivers the heat. Our recipe provides medium heat. For more spice, increase the amount of cayenne.
Paprika – Go with regular, or sweet. Smoked is fine, but sweet (or regular) is traditional
Onion and garlic powders – You can substitute granulated onion and/or garlic, if desired.
Brown sugar – Dark or light.
Salt – Kosher.
Flour – We recommend self-rising, but all-purpose can be substituted.
Oil – Vegetable works great for deep-frying. Shortening or lard are great choices, too.
Dill pickle slices and sliced white bread – For garnish. Don’t skip them, they are the perfect complement to the spicy chicken!

EXPERT TIP: The longer you allow the chicken to marinate, the more tender and flavorful the meat will be. However, we don’t recommend longer than 24 hours. Rinsing the chicken and then drying the pieces is an important step before you dredge the pieces.

Three images starting with a person using tongs to remove a chicken leg from a bowl of seasoned buttermilk and then chicken being rinsed in a sine then a person patting the chicken dry with paper towels.

Tips for Making Perfect Nashville Hot Chicken

Choose the Right Cut of Chicken – For an authentic taste, use bone-in, skin-on chicken pieces, such as thighs and drumsticks. This helps retain moisture and flavor during cooking, resulting in tender, juicy meat with a crispy exterior.

Marinate for Flavor – Marinate the chicken in buttermilk for at least a few hours or overnight. This not only tenderizes the meat but also adds a tangy flavor that complements the spicy coating.

Fry at the Right Temperature – Heat your oil to around 350°F (175°C) for frying. This ensures a crispy coating while cooking the chicken through without burning. Use a thermometer to maintain the temperature, and fry in batches to avoid overcrowding the pan.

Don’t Burn the Skin – Fry the chicken until is a deep golden crispy color. Some of the skin may pull away from the chicken. This is normal. The batter creates an extra crispy skin. A digital thermometer ensures the chicken is cooked to 165 to 170°F. Most likely, you will need to finish cooking the chicken in a 325°F oven for about 15 to 20 minutes.

EXPERT TIP: As you dredge the chicken, you will find that the coating is thick. You will probably need to clean your hands a couple of times as you go. Be sure to let the chicken rest after it is fully breaded while the oil heats. Sprinkle on more of the seasoned flour if you see any un-breaded spots.

Four images with the first a chicken thigh being dredged in flour and then in a wet batter then flour again and then resting on a baking rack.

How To Serve

Nashville Hot Chicken originated at Prince’s Hot Chicken Shack in Nashville. It is traditionally served with slices of white bread and dill pickle slices.

There is something about this combination of flavors that is incredible. The bread and pickles match perfectly with the spicy chicken.

If desired, have extra of the hot oil for folks who want to add even more. Remember, a little goes a long way!

We love to serve them in red plastic food baskets lined with butcher paper.

EXPERT TIP: You can fry the chicken in a deep-fryer or in a sturdy skillet with oil. DO NOT overfill the skillet with oil and do not overcrowd the pan with chicken. The deeper the skillet, the better. At least one inch of the side of the skillet should be visible (above the oil). If hot oil spills over and flames ensue, DO NOT add water. Cover the skillet with a lid or baking sheet and turn off the heat.

An overhead view of four chicken legs that have been breaded and deep-fried in a deep fryer and are resting in the fryer basket.

Other Classic Southern Fried Recipes to Try

We don’t recommend a steady diet of fried food. But, every now and then, there is nothing much better than whipping up a batch of good ole fried chicken, or whatever sounds good to you. Here is a collection of our favorites:

These are all crispy and delicious, without a doubt. But, in the meantime, isn’t this perfectly fried dish calling your name?

A person using a small brush to apply Nashville hot oil to a piece of Nashville fried chicken which is crispy leg on a baking rack.

How Spicy Is Nashville Hot Chicken

It’s got a kick, there is no question about it.

Again, you can control the amount of heat with how much cayenne pepper you use. The real heat comes from the paste that is brushed on after the chicken is fried.

It’s what we like to call a “slow burn.” It’s not like biting into a hot pepper that immediately burns your taste buds, but it’s more than what you would call ‘mild.’

Let’s just say that if you don’t like any level of spice to your food, then you might just want to stick with good ole Southern Fried Chicken!

An overhead view of numerous pieces of Nashville hot chicken resting on a baking rack in a baking pan.

If you are curious about this dish, we highly recommend you try it.

In over a decade of publishing recipes, this was the first one to ever garner a “Million Percent Loon Approved” status.

Don’t forget the white bread and pickles. We love to serve it alongside mashed potatoes and baked beans for the perfect Nashville feast!

To say this chicken is a flavor explosion would be the understatement of the century. And, it’s so much fun to make! Just be sure to cook until the internal temperature reaches 165 to 170°F, which probably will require you to finish off the chicken in the oven.

A close-up view of a piece of Nashville hot chicken sitting on a slice of white bread with two dill pickle slices attached to the chicken with a toothpick.

Ready to make the best chicken this side of Tennessee? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person using a small brush to apply Nashville hot oil to a piece of Nashville fried chicken which is crispy leg on a baking rack.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Nashville Hot Chicken

This iconic dish is exploding with bold, delicious flavors. The seasoned buttermilk marinade produces a flavorful, juicy chicken, and the batter creates a super crispy exterior. The classic Nashville hot oil/paste puts it over the top. This has become a national treasure for a reason!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time40 minutes
Marinating6 hours
Total Time7 hours
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 768kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 3 lbs chicken pieces skin-on, bone-in

For the Marinade

  • 3 cups buttermilk
  • ¼ cup cayenne pepper
  • 2 tablespoon paprika
  • 2 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 2 tablespoon onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon brown sugar

For the Seasoned Flour and Frying

  • 2 cups self-rising flour
  • 3 tablespoon cayenne pepper
  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 tablespoon onion powder
  • 2 tablespoon brown sugar
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • vegetable oil for frying

For the Hot Oil Paste

  • ¾ cup frying oil from frying the chicken
  • 2 tablespoon cayenne pepper more for extra heat
  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 1 tablespoon brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For Serving

  • 8 slices white bread
  • dill pickle slices

Instructions

  • Pat the chicken dry and place it in a large bowl.
    3 lbs chicken pieces
  • Add the buttermilk, cayenne, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, and brown sugar into a medium bowl or large measuring cup. Whisk until fully combined and the sugar has dissolved.
    3 cups buttermilk, ¼ cup cayenne pepper, 2 tablespoon paprika, 2 tablespoon garlic powder, 2 tablespoon onion powder, 1 tablespoon brown sugar
  • Pour the buttermilk mixture over the chicken. If not fully submerged, add enough buttermilk to cover all of the chicken pieces. Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 4 to 6 hours, or even better, overnight.
  • One by one, remove the chicken pieces from the marinade, allowing the excess to drip back into the bowl. Place the chicken in a large colander. Don't discard the remaining marinade. Rinse the chicken in the sink and then pat dry with paper towels.
  • Create the seasoned flour by stirring together the flour, cayenne pepper, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, brown sugar, and salt in a baking dish or platter.
    2 cups self-rising flour, 3 tablespoon cayenne pepper, 1 tablespoon paprika, 1 tablespoon garlic powder, 1 tablespoon onion powder, 2 tablespoon brown sugar, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Place a baking rack inside a baking pan.
  • Working one piece at a time, dredge the chicken in the flour until coated. Dip the coated chicken into the reserved marinade until coated. Add back to the flour and sprinkle on more flour to fully cover. Place the breaded chicken pieces on the baking rack.
  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Heat the oil to 350°F. Working in batches, carefully add the chicken pieces into the hot oil and gently move them around to keep them from sticking to each other or the basket (or bottom of the skillet). Fry until the skin is crispy and a deep golden color. Remove from the oil onto a cutting board lined with paper towels. Continue with the remaining chicken pieces.
    vegetable oil
  • Use a digital thermometer to check the internal temperature of the thickest part of the chicken. Place the chicken on the baking rack, put it into the oven, and bake until the internal temperature reaches 165 to 170°F. Test several places in the chicken to ensure all chicken pieces are fully cooked (it's okay if some are over 170°F).
  • Meanwhile, add the hot fry oil (¾ cup) to a heatproof bowl. Stir in the cayenne pepper, paprika, brown sugar, garlic powder, and salt.
    ¾ cup frying oil, 2 tablespoon cayenne pepper, 1 tablespoon paprika, 1 tablespoon brown sugar, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Brush the oil over the tops of the chicken. Serve at once with slices of white bread and pickle slices.
    8 slices white bread, dill pickle slices

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Be very careful when adding the chicken to the hot oil. If using a skillet, don't add too much oil (don't fill past one inch from the top of the skillet). And don't overcrowd the skillet with the chicken. Work in batches. The chicken will finish cooking in the oven.
The chicken and hot oil/paste can be prepared several hours in advance of serving. Finish off in the oven for about 20 to 30 minutes before serving. 
Leftovers will keep (covered) for up to 5 days. Reheat in a low-temp oven, or serve at room temperature. 

Nutrition

Calories: 768kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 12g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 129mg | Sodium: 698mg | Potassium: 983mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 8549IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 217mg | Iron: 4mg

Breakfast Tacos (3 Ways)

by Leave a Comment

When you make these tacos from scratch, you’ll wonder why they are not popular worldwide!

We can’t think of a better to celebrate breakfast than with these incredible stuffed tacos. Of course, the homemade flour tortillas put them in a league of their own. But, no matter how you do it, they are sure to be a huge hit when served to loved ones. The only challenge is picking a favorite taco!

An overhead view of two large black plate filled with breakfast tacos that are stuffed with eggs, chorizo, bacon, potatoes, and sitting next to a bowl of pico de gallo.

How To Make Breakfast Tacos (3 Ways)

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

You have so many options when it comes to putting together breakfast tacos. You can do all of the following, parts of it, or whatever sounds like a good taco to you! Here’s the lineup we love to serve for a breakfast taco party:

For All Tacos

Tortillas – Traditionally, flour tortillas are used when serving breakfast tacos. However, corn tortillas are great to have on hand, too Wrap in a lightly damp cloth and heat in the microwave until very soft and pliable.
Eggs – Scramble is typical, but fried eggs are a great option, too. We highly recommend using our ‘fluffiest scrambled eggs’ recipe!
Cheese – Shredded Monterey jack, cheddar, or Mexican chihuahua are all perfect choices.
Pico de gallo – This is a classic Tex-Mex condiment and ideal for breakfast tacos. You can often find it at supermarkets, Hispanic markets, or at your local Tex-Mex restaurant. Homemade is easy and very good.
Breakfast salsa – Simply simmer two tomatoes, 1 jalapeño, ½ chopped onion, and 3 garlic cloves in water for about 7 minutes. Remove the seeds from the pepper. Then puree it with 1 teaspoon salt and ½ teaspoon ground cumin in your blender or food processor.

Other toppings – Hot sauce (ie, Cholula) and chopped cilantro.

For the Bacon, Egg, and Cheese Taco

Bacon – Fry it up (save the grease for potatoes) and serve it nice and crispy.
Refried beans – Homemade or purchased from your favorite Tex-Mex / Mexican restaurant.
Other Fillings – Eggs, Cheese, Pico de Gallo, Salsa.
Tortillas – Flour, homemade or purchased.

For the Egg, Potato, and Cheese

Sautéed potatoes – Simply boil gold potatoes for about 40 minutes and then cool. Peel and cube and then cook (with chopped onion) in bacon grease. Season with salt and pepper.
Other Fillings – Eggs, Cheese, Salsa, Cilantro.
Tortillas – Flour or corn.

For the Chorizo, Egg, and Potato with Beans and Cheese

Fresh chorizo – Be sure to seek out raw chorizo, a seasoned ground sausage. You don’t want to cured kind. It can be found in the meat department of many supermarkets, at Hispanic markets, or at your local butcher. Breakfast sausage can be substituted.
Other fillings – Eggs, sautéd potatoes, refried beans, cheese, pico de gallo, hot sauce.
Tortillas – This is a loaded taco, so a nice sturdy flour tortilla is recommended.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to scramble the eggs over very low heat. Allow the eggs to set a bit, and then use a silicone (or rubber) spatula to push the eggs around in the pan as they are slowly starting to scramble. Once cooked, place in a heat-resistant bowl with a tight-fitting lid. They will stay warm as you prep the remaining ingredients.

A close-up view of creamy and fluffy scrambled eggs in a stainless steel skillet with a wooden spatula off to the side.

Tips for Making the Best Authentic Breakfast Tacos

Choose Fresh Ingredients – Use high-quality, fresh ingredients for the filling, such as farm-fresh eggs, top-notch bacon and chorizo, and ripe tomatoes and fresh cilantro.

Perfectly Cook the Eggs – For a creamy texture, scramble the eggs over low heat and remove them from the heat just before they’re fully cooked, as they will continue to cook in the residual heat. You can also add a splash of milk or cream for extra richness.

Warm the Fresh Tortillas – Homemade tortillas will give the ultimate authentic taste and texture. To enhance the flavor and texture of your tacos, warm corn or flour tortillas in the microwave or on a hot skillet. This adds a depth of flavor and makes them easier to fold.

Layer with Flavor – Build your tacos by layering the ingredients thoughtfully—start with the beans and eggs, and then add your choice of meat, followed by toppings like pico de galls, jalapeños, and a drizzle of salsa or hot sauce. This ensures every bite is packed with flavor.

EXPERT TIP: After you’ve fried the bacon in the pan, leave 2 to 3 tablespoons to lightly fry the prepared potatoes with the onion. If you don’t have bacon grease, you can use butter or vegetable oil. Season liberally with salt and pepper.

A close-up view of sautéed cubed yellow potatoes and onion in a cast-iron skillet with a wooden spatula off to the side.

How To Serve

Feel free to serve just one version of these tacos, or serve all three!

Prepare each component and then keep them warm in a low-temp oven until ready to place everything out on platters.

It takes some planning to make a full breakfast taco bar, but the results are always a huge hit. We love doing this during the holiday season with the extended family.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to seek out raw chorizo sausage. Often you will find them as links. All you need to do is remove the casings and then break the sausage up in your skillet as you cook it. If it’s not lean sausage, you may need to safely discard excess rendered grease.

A view looking into a large cast-iron skillet that is filled with fully cooked chorizo sauce with a wooden spatula off to the side.

Other Tex-Mex Recipes for Breakfast

We love serving Tex-Mex and Mexican dishes for breakfast or brunch. Here is a collection of recipes that are sure to please everyone who’s hungry for a delicious way to start the day!

These are all amazing, without a doubt! But, in the meantime, aren’t these epic tacos calling your name?

An overhead view of a black plate that is filled with three types of stuffed breakfast tacos that are topped with shredded Monterey Jack cheese.

If you love a good breakfast and if you love Tex-Mex cuisine, you and your loved ones will flip for these tacos.

Make as much as you can from scratch and then place everything out on serving dishes, or even directly from the skillet and pans.

They are even amazing the next day for leftovers or a late-night snack.

Every single bite is Tex-Mex perfection!

A person holding up a breakfast taco that is made with a homemade flour tortilla and is stuffed with eggs, bacon, cheese, and topped with pico de gallo.

Ready to make the best Tex-Mex breakfast this side of San Antonio? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of two large black plate filled with breakfast tacos that are stuffed with eggs, chorizo, bacon, potatoes, and sitting next to a bowl of pico de gallo.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Breakfast Tacos (3 Ways)

Breakfast Tacos are a staple in Southern Texas and across Mexico. The possibilities are practically endless. We give three versions within this recipe but feel free to adapt to your and your family's likes. Keep everything covered and warm as you go. And leftovers are amazing!
Prep Time45 minutes
Cook Time45 minutes
Total Time1 hour 30 minutes
Course: Breakfast
Cuisine: Tex-Mex, Mexican
Servings: 6
Calories: 687kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

For the Bacon, Egg, and Cheese Tacos

For the Potato, Egg, and Cheese Tacos

  • 4 medium Yukon gold potatoes
  • 2 tablespoon bacon grease or butter
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon salt divided
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 large eggs
  • 6 flour tortillas warmed
  • ½ cup Monterey Jack cheese shredded
  • 1 cup pico de gallo

For the Chorizo, Egg, and Potato with Beans and Cheese Tacos

  • 4 medium Yukon gold potatoes
  • 2 tablespoon bacon grease or butter
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon salt divided
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 large eggs
  • 1 lb Mexican chorizo fresh (not cured)
  • 1 cup refried beans heated
  • 6 flour tortillas warmed
  • ½ cup Monterrey Jack cheese shredded
  • Salsa

Instructions

Make the Bacon, Egg, and Cheese Tacos

  • In a large skillet over medium heat, cook the bacon until crisp. Place on a paper towel-lined plate and set aside. (Reserve the grease if making potatoes for the other tacos).
    8 slices thick bacon
  • Vigorously whisk the eggs in a large bowl. Add ½ teaspoon water to the eggs. Immediately transfer the whisked eggs into a large skillet over low heat. Allow the eggs to rest in the skillet without stirring for about 1 minute. Use a rubber spatula to slowly move the eggs around in the skillet. Allow the uncooked eggs to fall in place of the eggs that are starting to scramble. Continue doing this until the eggs are almost completely cooked. Stir in ½ teaspoon salt, remove from the heat, stir one more time, and cover. The eggs will finish cooking in the pan. Set aside.
    8 large eggs, salt
  • To build each taco, smear about 2 tablespoon of beans down the center of each warmed tortilla. Top with a mound of eggs, a strip (or two) of bacon, and top with cheese and salsa.
    1 cup refried beans, 6 flour tortillas, ½ cup Monterey Jack cheese, salsa

Make the Potato, Egg, and Cheese Tacos

  • Bring a pot of water to a boil. Add the potatoes and simmer for 40 minutes, or until a knife can easily pierce through the entire potato. Transfer to an ice bath. Once cool enough to handle, peel the skin off and use a knife to cut the potatoes into small cubes. (This can be done up to 2 hours in advance. Cover until ready to cook them).
    4 medium Yukon gold potatoes
  • Heat the bacon grease (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the potatoes and onions and cook until lightly browned, about 5 to 7 minutes. Stir in ½ teaspoon salt and pepper, each. Cover and set aside.
    2 tablespoon bacon grease, 1 medium onion, 1 teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Vigorously whisk the eggs in a large bowl. Add ½ teaspoon water to the eggs. Immediately transfer the whisked eggs into a large skillet over low heat. Allow the eggs to rest in the skillet without stirring for about 1 minute. Use a rubber spatula to slowly move the eggs around in the skillet. Allow the uncooked eggs to fall in place of the eggs that are starting to scramble. Continue doing this until the eggs are almost completely cooked. Stir in ½ teaspoon salt, remove from the heat, stir one more time, and cover. The eggs will finish cooking in the pan. Set aside.
    8 large eggs
  • To build each taco, Layer a mound of eggs down the center of each warmed tortilla. Top with about 1 to 2 tablespoon of cooked potatoes. Top with cheese and pico de gallo.
    6 flour tortillas, ½ cup Monterey Jack cheese, 1 cup pico de gallo

Make the Chorizo, Egg, and Potato with Beans and Cheese Tacos

  • Bring a pot of water to a boil. Add the potatoes and simmer for 40 minutes, or until a knife can easily pierce through the entire potato. Transfer to an ice bath. Once cool enough to handle, peel the skin off and use a knife to cut the potatoes into small cubes. (This can be done up to 2 hours in advance. Cover until ready to cook them).
    4 medium Yukon gold potatoes
  • Heat the bacon grease (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the potatoes and onions and cook until lightly browned, about 5 to 7 minutes. Season with ½ teaspoon salt and pepper, each. Cover and set aside.
    2 tablespoon bacon grease, 1 medium onion, 1 teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Vigorously whisk the eggs in a large bowl. Add ½ teaspoon water to the eggs. Immediately transfer the whisked eggs into a large skillet over low heat. Allow the eggs to rest in the skillet without stirring for about 1 minute. Use a rubber spatula to slowly move the eggs around in the skillet. Allow the uncooked eggs to fall in place of the eggs that are starting to scramble. Continue doing this until the eggs are almost completely cooked. Stir in ½ teaspoon salt, remove from the heat, stir one more time, and cover. The eggs will finish cooking in the pan. Set aside.
    8 large eggs
  • Add the chorizo to a large skillet over medium heat. Break the meat up with a wooden spatula or spoon. Sauté until fully cooked. Drain excess rendered grease, if necessary. Cover and set aside.
    1 lb Mexican chorizo
  • To build each taco, smear about 2 tablespoon of beans down the center of each warmed tortilla. Top with a mound of eggs, a small layer of potatoes, then a spoonful of cooked chorizo, and then top with cheese and salsa.
    1 cup refried beans, 6 flour tortillas, ½ cup Monterrey Jack cheese, Salsa

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
If not making the tortillas, beans, and salsa from scratch, considering ordering them from your favorite Tex-Mex/Mexican restaurant. Gently reheat the beans on the stove and wrap the tortillas in a lightly damp linen (or paper towel) and microwave them on HIGH for 30 to 60 seconds until warm, soft, and pliable. 
Leftovers will keep in covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. Place unused tortillas in a sealed baggie to keep them fresh. 
BREAKFAST SALSA:
  • 2 vine-rip tomatoes
  • 1 jalapeño
  • 1 medium onion, roughly chopped
  • 3 garlic cloves
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
Bring a pot of water to a boil and then add the tomatoes, pepper, onion, and garlic. Boil them for 7 minutes. Carefully remove the pepper, slice it open, and remove the seeds and stem. Drain the remaining vegetables. Add to a blender (or food processor) along with the salt and pepper. Purée until smooth. Serve warm or at room temperature. 

Nutrition

Calories: 687kcal | Carbohydrates: 78g | Protein: 52g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 459mg | Sodium: 763mg | Potassium: 752mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 1493IU | Vitamin C: 50mg | Calcium: 450mg | Iron: 10mg

Homemade Beef Ravioli with Tomato Sauce

by Leave a Comment

This is one of those fun weekend dishes that is simply unforgettable.

There is just something magical about homemade pasta. It’s not difficult to prepare, and so many pasta dishes are elevated to culinary greatness when it’s made from scratch. This recipe is one of those dishes. Much can be done in advance! Impress your loved ones with this Italian classic!

A close-up view of an antique bowl that is filled with a serving of homemade beef ravioli that is topped with a tomato sauce, shredded parmesan cheese, and chopped basil.

How To Make Homemade Beef Ravioli with Tomato Sauce

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

When making homemade ravioli, the key is homemade pasta. The filling and the sauce should not distract from the light, delicious homemade pasta. For this recipe, here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

For the Homemade Pasta

Semolina flour – Available in the baking section of many well-stocked supermarkets. Or online. If you can’t get it, you can go with all-purpose flour.
Flour – All-purpose.
Salt – Table or Kosher (if using Kosher, use half the amount).
Eggs – Lightly beaten.
Oil – Olive oil is perfect. Extra virgin olive oil will work, too.
Water – As needed.

For the Filling and Sauce

Butter – Unsalted, or olive oil (for sautéing).
Mirepoix – Chopped onion, celery, and carrot. We use our food processor to chop the peeled carrots.
Ground beef – 90% lean sirloin is excellent.
Seasonings – Salt, pepper, Italian seasoning.
Red wine – Cabernet or Zinfandel are good choices. Nothing expensive. We don’t recommend cooking wine. If you don’t want to cook with wine, substitute beef broth.
Oil – Olive oil or extra virgin olive oil, for sautéing.
Garlic – Fresh and finely minced.
Fresh tomatoes – Romas are perfect. You can also substitute a 28. oz can of whole San Marzano tomatoes with their juices.
Basil – Fresh is best.

EXPERT TIP: The beef will render grease as it cooks. We recommend tilting the skillet to the side, pushing the meat aside, and using a large spoon to remove most of the grease from the pan into a small bowl. Be sure to cook until most of the red wine has cooked out. 98% of the alcohol will burn off as it simmers. If you wish to not cook with wine, substitute beef broth or stock.

A straight-on view of a cooked ground beef mixture combined with sautéed onions, carrots, celery, and simmered with red wine.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Ravioli with Tomato Sauce

Allow the Filling to Cool – Once you’ve prepared the beef filling, it’s important to allow it to cool somewhat before transferring it to the food processor with the eggs, cheese, and breadcrumbs. If you add the eggs while the filling is still piping hot, it could lightly scramble the eggs.

Prepare Fresh Pasta Dough – We just can’t stress this enough. To make this dish special, we highly recommend making the pasta dough from scratch.

Seal the Ravioli Properly – When assembling the ravioli, ensure that you seal them tightly to prevent the filling from leaking during cooking. Use a little water on the edges of the pasta to help it stick, and press out any air pockets before sealing.

Don’t Let the Prepared Ravioli Dry Out – You can make the ravioli a couple hours in advance of cooking them, but you’ll need to make sure they are covered, preferably with a damp towel (not too wet!). Don’t go for more than two hours, because the filling will make the ravioli pasta soggy.

EXPERT TIP: A fluted pastry wheel makes cutting the pasta easy and gives it the classic ravioli look. If you don’t have a pastry wheel, you can cut the pasta with a sharp knife.

Three images with the first being a meat mixture being spoon onto a strip of a rectangular strip of homemade pasta, and then a pasty cutter being used to cut the uncooked ravioli into individual pieces and then all the ravioli on a floured baking pan.

How to Serve

As mentioned, this dish is served piping hot, preferably right after the ravioli comes out of the boiling water. Lightly heat the sauce before adding to the sauce.

Be very gentle as you remove the ravioli from the hot water. You can carefully drain them into a colander. If any ravioli break open, don’t worry, they are still delicious.

Don’t overdo it when adding the sauce. The sauce and grated Parmesan cheese complement the light, billowing clouds of ravioli. Have extra sauce and cheese at the table for anyone who wants extra.

A ladle being used to transfer a tomato sauce onto a pile of cooked homemade beef ravioli in an antique bowl.

Other Classic Italian Pasta Recipes to Try

Everyone has their favorite pasta dish. Here is a collection of homemade pasta dishes that we are certain you and your family will absolutely love!

These are all amazing in their own right, but, in the meantime, isn’t this ravioli calling your name?

A straight-on view of two antique bowls that are each filled with a serving of homemade beef ravioli with tomato sauce and grated parmesan cheese.

There is something very special about homemade ravioli.

It is a bit of a labor of love when you make the pasta from scratch. But, the end result is so worth it.

Serve with a nice Caesar salad, warm bread, and a lovely bottle of wine. Pasta night perfection!

Every bite is simply divine!

A close-up view of homemade beef ravioli that is on a white plate with a bite take from one ravioli with the beef interior revealed.

Ready to make the best pasta dish this side of Rome? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of an antique bowl that is filled with a serving of homemade beef ravioli that is topped with a tomato sauce, shredded parmesan cheese, and chopped basil.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Homemade Beef Ravioli with Tomato Sauce

Homemade ravioli is pasta perfection. Making the pasta from scratch isn't difficult and puts this dish over the top. The beef filling and the simple tomato sauce can be made in advance. The ravioli can be assembled up to 2 hours in advance. Cook the ravioli just before serving. Pasta perfection!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Pasta making1 hour
Total Time1 hour 50 minutes
Course: Appetizer / Entree
Cuisine: Italian
Servings: 4
Calories: 487kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

For the Ravioli

  • 1 lb fresh pasta
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 cup celery chopped
  • 1 cup carrots chopped
  • 1 lb ground beef 90% lean
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • ½ cup dry red wine
  • 2 large eggs lightly beaten
  • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated, plus more for serving
  • ¼ cup breadcrumbs plain

For the Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1½ lbs Roma tomatoes seeded and chopped
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoon basil fresh, chopped, plus more for garnish

Instructions

Do Ahead (up to 2 hours)

  • Make the pasta sheets. Sprinkle with semolina flour or cornmeal. Keep on a large baking sheet covered with a lightly damp kitchen towel.
    1 lb fresh pasta

Make the Beef Filling

  • Melt the butter in a large saucepan over medium heat. Add the onion, celery, and carrots and sauté until soft, about 5 to 7 minutes.
    2 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 medium onion, 1 cup celery, 1 cup carrots
  • Add the beef and break it up with a wooden spatula or spoon. Cook until no longer pink. Safely discard of most of any rendered grease, leaving about 1 tablespoon in the pan. Season the meat with salt, pepper, and Italian seasoning.
    1 lb ground beef, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, 2 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • Stir in the red wine and simmer until almost all the liquid has evaporated. Remove from heat and let cool slightly (at least 15 minutes).
    ½ cup dry red wine
  • Carefully transfer the meat mixture to a food processor. Add the eggs, cheese, and breadcrumbs. Purée until smooth. Transfer to a bowl and set aside.
    2 large eggs, ½ cup Parmesan cheese, ¼ cup breadcrumbs

Assemble the Ravioli

  • Lay a pasta sheet on a lightly floured surface. Fold the sheet over, lengthwise, halfway, and then open it back up. This will help you keep an eye on where the center of the sheet of pasta is. Each pasta sheet should be about 4 inches wide.
  • Beginning about 1 inch from one of the short ends, place teaspoons of the filling about 1 inch apart in a straight row down the center of one side of the fold. Dip a pastry brush in water (or your fingertip) and lightly brush water around each mound of the filling.
  • Fold the dough over the filling, molding it around the filling to press out any air pockets. Use your fingertips and firmly press the edges of the dough together to seal.
  • Use a fluted pastry wheel (or a sharp knife) to cut between the mounds of filling. Separate the squares and place, without touching, in a single layer on a floured baking sheet. Cover with a lightly damp kitchen towel. You can cook them immediately, or, keep them covered for up to 2 hours.
  • Bring a pot of liberally salted water to a boil.

Make the Tomato Sauce

  • Heat the oil in a saucepan over medium heat. Add the minced garlic and sauté for several minutes. Add the tomatoes and cook, stirring often, and pressing on the tomatoes occasionally, for about 7 minutes.
    ¼ cup olive oil, 4 cloves garlic, 1½ lbs Roma tomatoes
  • Season with salt, pepper, and fresh basil.
    1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, 2 tablespoon basil

Finish the Dish

  • Carefully place the prepared ravioli into the boiling water. Cook for about 3 to 4 minutes. Carefully drain.
  • Divide the ravioli among plates, top with the sauce and additional freshly grated parmesan and chopped fresh basil.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Depending on how much pasta you prepare, you may have extra beef filling. It's wonderful when used in stuffed manicotti, too. It freezes perfectly for up to several months. 
The beef filling and sauce can be made up to 24 hours in advance. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for several days. However, the ravioli is best served fresh. 

Nutrition

Calories: 487kcal | Carbohydrates: 83g | Protein: 44g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 280mg | Sodium: 798mg | Potassium: 1216mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 7410IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 284mg | Iron: 8mg

Dal Makhani

by 3 Comments

This dish is one of our favorite Indian dishes. With one taste, you’ll understand why.

The flavor profile of this dal is transcendent. It’s often considered a “special occasion” meal in India. The homemade garam masala deepens the flavor profile. Give yourself a little time to prepare the dish, and make sure someone is nearby to provide the occasional stir! And don’t forget to pick up some naan (Indian flatbread).

A straight-on view of a colorful blue bowl that is filled with a serving of dal makhani with another bowl of cooked basmati rice in the background.

How To Make Dal Makhani

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

If you enjoy making a trip to an Indian food market as much as we do, it’s time to make another trip! If you don’t have an Indian market in your area, you can order some of the hard-to-find ingredients online. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Black lentils (whole urad dal) – Found at Indian food markets or online. You can usually find black lentils at Whole Foods in the U.S.
Butter – We love Indian butter called Amul Pasteurized Butter which can be found in Indian food markets or online. Regular unsalted butter is perfectly fine, too.
Ghee – Can be found in the International section of many well-stocked supermarkets, at Indian markets, or online.
Onion – Chopped.
Ginger garlic paste – Can be found in Indian markets or online. You can substitute 1 tablespoon of finely chopped fresh garlic and 10 cloves of finely minced garlic.
Tomato purée – Can substitute tomato sauce.
Salt – Kosher or table salt are both good choices.
Kashmiri chili powder – Can be found in an Indian market or online. Regular chili powder can be substituted.
Garam masala – Homemade is wonderful. However, you can find this in the spice section of many well-stocked supermarkets, at Indian food markets, or online.
Cream – Heavy (or double) cream is recommended.

EXPERT TIP: Place the lentils in a pot and cover them with water. As they simmer, you will need to add more water, typically about half a cup every 30 minutes. After the lentils become soft (after about 90 minutes), you’ll want enough water still in the pot to just cover the lentils.

A view into a large stock pot that is filled with black lentils that have been simmering for several hours in a water with a wooden spatula inserted into the side.

Tips for Making Perfect Dal Makhani

Use Quality Lentils – For the best texture and flavor, use whole black urad dal (black lentils) and soak them overnight to ensure they cook evenly and become tender, resulting in a creamy consistency.

Slow Cooking is Key – Cook the dal slowly over low heat to develop deep flavors. Using a pressure cooker can speed up the process, but for authentic taste, simmering the dal for several hours allows the spices to meld beautifully and the lentils to break down into a rich, creamy sauce.

Rich and Creamy Base – Incorporate a generous amount of butter and cream towards the end of cooking to achieve the signature richness of dal makhani. You can also add a splash of milk for extra creaminess if desired. Go with top-notch butter and cream for optimal flavor.

Layering Flavors – If possible, seek out authentic spices to make the best dal makhani. The ghee, ginger garlic sauce, Kashmiri chili powder, and garam masala help to create an authentic taste and texture.

How To Serve

This dish is definitely best served warm, even piping hot. Right from the pot is best.

You’ll want to have some fresh naan (Indian bread) and basmati rice. See the NOTES on how to make classic basmati rice.

If the dal feels too thick, simply bring it to a simmer and add more water. It should be the consistency of a thick Texas-style chili.

And remember to finish each serving with a nice layer of heavy cream and a pat (or two) of butter.

An overhead view of a large pot of dal makhani with a pat of butter that is melting in the center of it.

Other Amazing Indian Recipes to Try

Indian cuisine is one of the most varied and flavorful foods in the world. Here is a collection of some of our homemade favorites that we are certain you and your family will love!

These are all amazing without a doubt. But, in the meantime, isn’t this dish calling your name?

A close-up view of a colorful bowl that is filled with a serving of dal makhani that is topped with a circular formation of cream and a pat of melting butter in the center.

If you’ve never tried to cook an authentic Indian dish, this is a great place to start.

It does require a little tender, love, and care. Mostly just with frequent stirring.

But, it’s hard to mess up. And if you start with classic, authentic ingredients, you will produce one of the tastiest and most luxurious dishes in the world.

It’s really that good! And, as mentioned…don’t forget bread to plunge into the dal!

A straight-on view of a person holding a folded piece of naan bread that has been plunged into a bowl of homemade dal makhani and is being held above the bowl with lentils dripping from it.

Ready to make the best dal this side of Dehli? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a blue bowl filled with a serving of dal makhani and topped with cream and melted butter in the center with pieces of naan on the plate nearby.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Dal Makhal

Dal Makhal is truly one of the greatest dishes in the world. The depth of flavor is amazing. It's creamy, buttery, and simply amazing. You may need to make a run to your local Indian food market or order some ingredients online. Be sure to pick up some homemade naan (Indian bread) and make a batch of basmati rice (recipe in the NOTES) and you'll have a special feast that you'll want to make time and time again.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time3 hours
Soaking time12 hours
Total Time15 hours 15 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Indian
Servings: 8
Calories: 265kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large pot to hold the lentils and enough water to cover them by 1 inch.
  • pot for simmering

Ingredients

  • 14 oz black lentils whole urad dal
  • 4 tablespoon butter plus extra for serving
  • 1 tablespoon ghee
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 2 tablespoon ginger garlic paste
  • 1 cup tomato purée
  • 2 teaspoon salt plus more, to taste
  • 2 teaspoon Kashmiri chili powder
  • 2 teaspoon garam masala
  • ¼ cup heavy cream plus extra for serving

Instructions

  • Soak the lentils in a pot with water (about 1 inch over the beans) for at least 6 hours, or even better, overnight.
    14 oz black lentils
  • Drain the lentils into a colander and then rinse them under cool water.
  • Place the lentils back into the pot and cover them with water (again, about 1 inch over the beans). Bring to a boil and then reduce the heat to medium and simmer them until they are soft, about 1 hour to 90 minutes, stirring frequently and adding water occasionally to maintain the same water level throughout.
  • Meanwhile, heat the ghee and 2 tablespoon butter over medium heat in a separate pot. Add the onions and cook for 12 minutes, stirring often. Add the ginger garlic paste and cook for another 3 minutes, stirring often.
    4 tablespoon butter, 1 tablespoon ghee, 1 medium onion, 2 tablespoon ginger garlic paste
  • Stir in the tomato purée, salt, chili powder, and garam masala. Cook for 2 minutes and then remove the pot from the heat. Set aside.
    1 cup tomato purée, 2 teaspoon salt, 2 teaspoon Kashmiri chili powder, 2 teaspoon garam masala
  • Once the lentils are tender, make sure there is enough water in the pan to just barely cover the lentils. Transfer the lentils (with liquid) into the pot with the tomato mixture. Mash some of the lentils with a masher or the back of a spoon. Bring to a simmer and cook, stirring often, for another 90 minutes, adding about 2 cups of water during the process.
  • Stir in the cream and the remaining 2 tablespoon of butter. Simmer for another 2 minutes. Taste and add more salt, if needed.
  • Serve at once in bowls topped with a swirl of heavy cream and a small pad of butter.
    ¼ cup heavy cream

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
See the blog post for substitutions for some of the authentic ingredients (and links to order them online). 
You'll want to stay near the lentils/dal while it's simmering and stir it every so often to prevent the bottom from sticking to the pan and possibly burning. 
The consistency of the dal should be like thick chili. Not too thin, but not too thick, either. 
Leftovers can be reheated in a pot over medium heat. Add more water to reach the desired consistency. They will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. The dal can be frozen for several months. 
CLASSIC BASMATI RICE:
  1. Add 1 cup of aged basmati rice to a bowl and cover it with water. Swish the rice around for a minute, then hold the rice back with your hand as you pour off the water. Repeat 2 more times and then transfer the rice into a colander. Rinse the rice with cool water.
  2. Bring two cups of water, 1 tablespoon ghee, 1 teaspoon salt, and several cardamom pods (if desired) to a boil. 
  3. Add the prepared rice to the boiling water. Cover and turn the heat to low. Cook for 10 to 12 minutes. Fluff with a fork and serve. 
 

Nutrition

Calories: 265kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 28mg | Sodium: 643mg | Potassium: 173mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 454IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 4mg

Wild Berry Bread Pudding with Orange Sauce

by Leave a Comment

This dessert is perfect year-round, but it’s especially wonderful during the summer when berries are in peak season.

This bread pudding hits all the right notes. It’s slightly sweet and slightly tart from the bursting berries. And the presentation is gorgeous. Just as the pumpkin bread pudding is wonderful during the fall months, this recipe is fantastic during the warm months. The perfect dessert for an outdoor BBQ!

A straight-on view of a slice of mixed berry bread pudding with orange sauce sitting on a white dessert plate with a glass mug of creamed coffee in the background.

How To Make Wild Berry Bread Pudding with Orange Sauce

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

You have options when it comes to creating this bread pudding. From the type of bread to the fruit, it’s up to you. Here’s what we love to include in our wild berry bread pudding:

For the Bread Pudding

Sliced bread – Country white bread is great, but, we love sourdough bread. But, whatever is your favorite will work. Let it sit out on the counter to dry out a bit, if you have time.
Berries – Go with any, or a combination of any of these berries: Blueberries, blackberries, raspberries, strawberries, cranberries, mulberries, rhubarb. You’ll need about 2 cups in total.
Orange zest – Use a zester to get fresh orange zest. If you don’t have a zester, you can scrape the fruit against the small holes on a box grater.
Butter – Unsalted.
Eggs – Fresh are best.
Milk – Whole milk or 2%.
Sugar – Granulated
Vanilla extract – We love Nielsen-Massey.

For the Orange Sauce

Egg yolks – Fresh are best.
Sugar – Granulated.
Cream – Heavy cream or double cream is recommended. Half and half can be substituted, but the sauce won’t be as luxurious.
Orange peel – Cut into a 1-inch strip.
Orange extract – This can be found in the baking/spice section of most well-stocked supermarkets.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to let the egg/milk mixture rest in the bread pudding for at least 30 minutes, no longer than 1 hour. This will allow the bread to absorb the liquid.

A person pouring an egg and cream mixture from a large glass measuring cup into a square baking dish that is filled with cubed bread and mixed berries.

Tips for Making Perfect Wild Berry Bread Pudding with Orange Sauce

Choose the Right Bread – Use a sturdy bread like sourdough, challah, brioche, or French bread, as they absorb the custard mixture well without becoming too soggy. Stale bread works best because it holds its shape and texture during baking.

Layer the Berries – Gently fold in fresh or frozen wild berries, such as blueberries, raspberries, or blackberries, into the bread mixture. For a burst of flavor, reserve some berries to sprinkle on top before baking, allowing them to caramelize slightly and create a beautiful presentation.

Let Rest Before Slicing – You’ll need the bread pudding to rest for at least 30 minutes before slicing into it. This will help the bread and cream to “set” and will make it easier to slice and will hold its shape when cutting into it.

Serve Warm – The bread pudding is best served warm. Prepare the orange sauce just before serving so it is fresh and pours perfectly. The bread pudding is best served within hours a few hours of it being baked.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to keep the orange sauce over medium-low heat. If the heat is too high, it will scramble the eggs. If you do get a little scrambling, that’s okay. Stir consistently, and then strain the sauce. It will still be delicious.

A close-up view of a wooden spoon that is being lifted from a saucepan that is filled with an orange sauce and that same sauce is dripping from the spoon.

How To Serve

As mentioned, this bread pudding is best served within a few hours of baking.

The entire dish can be assembled (without pouring the egg/milk mixture) up to 12 hours in advance.

Be sure to let the dish rest for 30 minutes to 1 hour before slicing. A nice cup of coffee is a delicious beverage to enjoy with the dessert. Dunk a forkful of the bread pudding into your coffee for even more flavor.

The presentation is so beautiful, that you can place the dish on the counter or a hot pad on the table and let guests serve themselves. Place the orange sauce in a pourable vessel to have nearby.

An overhead view of a square white baking dish that is filled with a fully cooked wild berry bread pudding and is surrounded by a bowl of blueberries and a festive linen.

Other Fruit-Forward Recipes to Try

Fruit is wonderful to serve and elevates dishes, especially when you going with fresh fruit. Here is a collection of some of our favorites that we are certain you and your guests will love, too!

These are all amazing, without a doubt. But, in the meantime, isn’t this dessert calling your name?

A person pouring a thick orange sauce over the top of a sliced of wild berry bread pudding that is sitting on a white dessert plate.

Bread pudding is a wonderful combination of sweet and tart.

The texture is melt-in-your-mouth delicious.

And the homemade orange sauce brings it all together.

This dessert is beautiful to serve, and always gets rave reviews from guests!

A straight-on view of a square piece of mixed berry bread pudding and orange sauce with a bite missing from it and a fork resting on the plate.

Ready to make the best wild berry dessert in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag @HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a slice of mixed berry bread pudding with orange sauce sitting on a white dessert plate with a glass mug of creamed coffee in the background.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Wild Berry Bread Pudding with Orange Sauce

This dessert is as beautiful as it is delicious. Go with your favorite types of berries. Be sure to serve the bread pudding within a few hours of baking, but don't forget to allow it to rest for 30 to 60 minutes (at least) before serving. It's wonderful served warm, especially with the warm orange sauce!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour
Resting time30 minutes
Total Time1 hour 45 minutes
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 498kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 10x10" dish or 9x13"

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon butter softened, for greasing the dish
  • 20 oz sliced bread usually 1 loaf, crusts removed and cubed
  • 2 cups fresh berries blueberries, raspberries, blackberries
  • Zest 1 orange about 1 tbsp
  • 6 large eggs
  • 4 cups whole milk
  • 1 cup sugar plus 2 tablespoon for topping
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ½ cup unsalted butter 1 stick, melted

For the Orange Sauce

  • 3 large egg yolks
  • ¼ cup sugar
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • 1 orange peel strip about 1 inch
  • ½ teaspoon orange extract

Instructions

  • In a greased 10x10" or 9x13" baking dish, place half of the bread cubes and then half of the berries. Sprinkle the orange zest over the top. Add the remaining bread cubes and then berries.
    1 tablespoon butter, 20 oz sliced bread, 2 cups fresh berries, Zest 1 orange
  • In a large bowl, or measuring cup, mix the eggs, 1 cup sugar, and vanilla until blended. Pour over the bread mixture. Let stand for 30 to 60 minutes.
    6 large eggs, 4 cups whole milk, 1 cup sugar, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Preheat oven to 350°F.
  • Pour the melted butter over the top of the dish and then sprinkle 2 tablespoon of sugar all over the top.
    ½ cup unsalted butter
  • Bake, uncovered, for 1 hour, rotating after about 30 minutes. Remove from oven and let rest for at least 30 minutes. Slice and serve with warm orange sauce.

Make the Orange Sauce

  • In a medium-sized saucepan, whisk the egg yolks and sugar together. Stir in the cream and orange peel.
    3 large egg yolks, ¼ cup sugar, 1 cup heavy cream, 1 orange peel strip, ½ teaspoon orange extract
  • Turn heat to medium-low and cook, stirring constantly, until the mixture is just thick enough to coat the back of a spoon, about 10 minutes. Do not let come to a boil. Transfer to a vessel and drizzle over sliced bread pudding.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
It's important to allow the bread pudding to rest for at least 30 minutes after baking. This will help the dish to "set" and not be overly mushy. 
This dish is best served within a few hours of baking. Although it's still tasty the next day, the berries will continue to soften and the appearance won't be as attractive. 

Nutrition

Calories: 498kcal | Carbohydrates: 73g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 291mg | Sodium: 462mg | Potassium: 358mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 1328IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 353mg | Iron: 3mg

Sloppy Joe Casserole

by 2 Comments

We’re taking the iconic loose meat sandwich and turning it into a casserole. Oh, yes we did!

If you love sloppy Joe sandwiches as much as we do, you are going to fall in love with this instant family-favorite casserole. The filling has the classic sloppy Joe flavor, and that’s topped with a layer of gooey cheddar cheese, topped with buttery puff pastry, and baked to perfection. Weeknight dinner never tasted so good!

An overhead view of an oval baking dish filled with Sloppy Joe Casserole that is topped with a golden brown puff pastry and part of the casserole is gone and a spoon in the dish.

How To Make Sloppy Joe Casserole

 

NOTE: If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredients you will need for this casserole are straightforward, and chances are, you may already have many of them on hand. Here’s what you’ll need:

Oil – Olive oil or extra virgin. Vegetable oil can be used, too.
Bell pepper – Green, red, or yellow are all great choices.
Ground beef – 85% or 90% lean. You’ll still want to spoon off most of the rendered excess grease. Ground turkey or chicken are great substitutions.
Stock – Beef broth or beef stock is perfect. You could also use chicken broth. Water will even work, if desired.
Sauces – Tomato sauce, chili sauce*, and Worcestershire sauce. *can be found in the condiments section of most markets, near the ketchup.
Mustard – Dijon is recommended, but ballpark yellow will work, too.
Vinegar – Apple cider is recommended, but red wine vinegar, or even distilled white vinegar will work just fine.
Brown sugar – Dark or light.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper.
Cheddar cheese – Preferably fresh shredded. Colby Jack, Monterrey Jack, or any other melting cheese are perfectly fine substitutions.
Puff pastry – Found in either the frozen section or refrigerated section of most supermarkets.
Egg – Combined with a splash of milk or water. This will make an egg wash that will give the pastry a golden brown color after baking.
Sesame seeds – Preferably toasted.
Scallions – Chopped, for garnish. Optional.

EXPERT TIP: You’ll want to simmer the mixture until it thickens and most of the liquid has evaporated out. However, you don’t want to cook it until all the liquid is gone. The consistency should be very juicy and should spread somewhat if spooned onto a plate. The melty cheese and puff pastry will hold it all together after it bakes.

A straight-on view of a large silver skillet filled with a sloppy Joe mixture and a wooden spatula in the middle of it.

Tips for Making a Perfect Sloppy Joe Casserole

Layer for Texture – When assembling your casserole, layer the Sloppy Joe mixture evenly in the baking dish, then sprinkle a generous amount of shredded cheddar cheese on top. This will create a gooey, cheesy layer that complements the savory filling. Make sure to cover the entire surface for even melting. If you like it extra cheesy, go with 2 cups of cheese.

Puff Pastry Preparation – For the puff pastry topping, roll out the pastry on a lightly floured surface to ensure it fits your baking dish. Cut it into strips or shapes to create an attractive design on top of the casserole. Brush the pastry with an egg wash (beaten egg with a splash of milk or water) for a golden, flaky finish when baked.

Bake to Perfection – Bake the casserole in a preheated oven at 375°F (190°C) until the puff pastry is golden brown and flaky, and the cheese is bubbly. This usually takes about 25-30 minutes. Keep an eye on it towards the end to prevent over-browning. Let it cool for a few minutes before serving to allow the layers to set.

EXPERT TIP: For the best cheesy taste and texture, grate the cheese by hand with a box grater or with a grating attachment in your food processor. We love our casserole extra cheesy, so we go with 2 cups of shredded cheese, but, 1½ cups is still cheesy, and a nice ratio to the filling and pastry topping.

An overhead view of a person sprinkling shredded cheddar cheese over the top of an oval casserole dish filled with a sloppy Joe mixture.

How To Serve

This dish is served best right out of the dish. Let it rest for about 5 minutes after baking. Then garnish with chopped scallions or chives, if desired.

One serving is filling and satisfying. However, to round out the meal, we like to serve it with simmered green beans or sweet corn.

Leftovers reheat perfectly in a preheated oven for 20 minutes at 325°F. Cover the top with foil since the top has already been browned.

EXPERT TIP: For an attractive topping, cut the puff pastries into squares, and then overlap them when placing them over the meat and cheese. Or, simply place the entire sheet over the top of the dish and trim away the edges. Both will yield a delicious topping. Don’t forget to brush the top with an egg and water (or milk) bath.

An overhead view of an oval baking dish that is filled with an uncooked sloppy Joe casserole that is topped with strips of puff pastry and topped with sesame seeds.

Other Delicious Weeknight Dinner Recipes to Try

We love a dish that is a little involved and requires some tender love and care when preparing. But, there’s not always time for that. Here is a collection of family-friendly dishes that are easy to prepare but are still extremely delicious.

These are all amazing in their own right. But, in the meantime, isn’t this dish calling your name?

An overhead view of sloppy Joe casserole in an oval baking dish that is topped with browned puff pastry and garnished with sesame seeds and chopped scallions.

If you’re looking for a new casserole that everyone in the family will love, then look no further.

It’s simple to prepare and the flavor combination is spot-on delicious.

It’s truly like eating a yummy sloppy Joe, but as a casserole. And leftovers are even better.

Weeknight dinner perfection!

A close-up view of a single serving of sloppy Joe casserole on a white dinner plate and is garnished with chopped scallions.

Ready to make the best casserole in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a single serving of sloppy Joe casserole on a white dinner plate and is garnished with chopped scallions.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Sloppy Joe Casserole

The name says it all. With this dish you enjoy the flavors of everyone's favorite loose-meat sandwich, but as a casserole. The gooey cheese on top of the savory meat is delicious. And the flakey puff pastries bring it all together. An instant family favorite!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time45 minutes
Total Time1 hour
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 567kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 10"x10" baking dish 9x13" will also work

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 green bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 2 lbs ground beef 90% lean
  • ¼ cup beef broth or stock
  • 1 15 oz can tomato sauce
  • ½ cup chili sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon brown sugar light or dark
  • 1½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1½ cups shredded cheddar cheese 2 cups for extra cheesy
  • 1 sheet puff pastry cut into squares (if desired)
  • 1 large egg lightly beaten
  • 1 tablespoon milk or water
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds for topping, optional
  • 2 scallions chopped, for garnish, optional

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 425°F.
  • Heat the oil over medium heat in a large skillet. Add the onion and bell pepper and sauté until soft and translucent, about 4 minutes.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 medium onion, 1 green bell pepper
  • Add the ground beef and break up with a wooden spatula. Cook, stirring occasionally, until no longer pink. Tilt the skillet and use a large spoon to remove most of the rendered grease (it's okay to leave some in the skillet). Discard safely.
    2 lbs ground beef
  • Add the beef broth, tomato sauce, chili sauce, Worcestershire sauce, mustard, vinegar, brown sugar, salt, and pepper. Bring to a simmer, stirring often.
    ¼ cup beef broth, 1 15 oz can tomato sauce, ½ cup chili sauce, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 tablespoon brown sugar, 1½ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Continue simmering over medium heat until the mixture has thickened and most of the liquid has cooked down, about 15 minutes.
  • Transfer the mixture to a baking dish. Top with the cheese, and then arrange the puff pastry squares over the cheese.
    1½ cups shredded cheddar cheese, 1 sheet puff pastry
  • In a small bowl, mix together the beaten egg and milk (or water). Brush the egg wash over the tops of the puff pastry. Sprinkle the sesame seeds on top.
    1 large egg, 1 tablespoon milk, 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • Bake until the puff pastry is browned (but not burned) and the sides are bubbly, about 12 to 15 minutes. Remove from oven and let rest for 5 minutes.
  • Serve at once, garnished with chopped scallions (if desired).
    2 scallions

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The dish can be prepared up to 12 hours in advance. Cover and keep in the fridge. Let the casserole sit out for about 15 to 20 minutes before baking (if it has been chilled). 
You don't have to cut the puff pastry into squares. You can place the entire sheet over the top of the baking dish and tuck in the sides. 
Leftovers can be reheated in the oven (325°F) or in the microwave. They will keep in the fridge for up to 5 to 7 days. 
The dish can be frozen (baked or unbaked) for 2 to 3 months. 

Nutrition

Calories: 567kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 167mg | Sodium: 603mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 607IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 274mg | Iron: 5mg

Stuffed Zucchini Boats

by 6 Comments

This dish is the perfect all-in-one vegetable and meat combo. Perfect for a weeknight dinner.

Zucchini is such a versatile vegetable. We love the Italian classic eggplant rolatini, and is similar to this recipe, but a little more involved. For this dish, homemade marinara is awesome, but top-notch bottled marinara will work, too. It’s the perfect meal for a busy weeknight dinner!

An overhead view of an antique platter filled with stuffed zucchini boats that are topped with melty cheese and surrounded by sprigs of parsley.

How To Make Stuffed Zucchini Boats

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

This recipe is humble, yet delicious and very filling. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Zucchini – You’ll need to scoop the seeds out of the center of each boat. Save for a smoothie, or simply discard.
Oil – Olive oil or extra-virgin olive oil is recommended.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper.
Onion – Chopped.
Garlic – Minced.
Italian sausage – Sweet, hot, or mild. Go with your favorite. If the sausages are in links, simply use a sharp knife to remove the casings.
Marinara sauce – Homemade is wonderful, but a good-quality bottled marinara will work just fine.
Basil – Fresh is best but dried will work, too.
Mozzarella – Freshly shredded is best.
Parmesan cheese – Freshly grated is best.

EXPERT TIP: We recommend cutting off the ends of each side of the zucchini before cutting it in half, lengthwise. Use the end of a spoon to scoop out the seeds. This gets rid of the seeds, but also creates a ‘boat’ for the sauce to go into.

A person holding a zucchini that has been cut in half lengthwise and is using a spoon to scrape out the seeds.

Tips for Making Perfect Stuffed Zucchini Boats

Choose the Right Zucchini – Select medium-sized zucchini that are firm and free from blemishes. They should be large enough to hold a good amount of stuffing but not so large that they become watery. Cut them in half lengthwise and scoop out the seeds to create a well for the filling.

Flavor the Filling – Sauté the Italian sausage with onions, garlic, and your choice of herbs (like oregano and basil) before mixing it with the tomato sauce. This enhances the flavor of the filling and ensures that the sausage is fully cooked and well-seasoned before it goes into the zucchini. Fresh herbs are always best, but dried herbs will work, too.

Layer the Cheese – For a deliciously cheesy topping, sprinkle a layer of mozzarella cheese over the stuffed zucchini boats, followed by a generous dusting of freshly grated Parmesan cheese. Bake until the cheese is bubbly and golden, which adds a rich flavor and appealing texture to the dish. If browning too quickly, cover with foil for the remainder of the baking.

A person spooning an Italian sausage and tomato sauce onto zucchini boats that have been cut in half, lengthwise, and the seeds carved out.

EXPERT TIP: Place the zucchini boats in a dish that is just wide enough to hold them so that they are holding themselves upright. Depending on how many boats you are preparing, you may need to use two dishes (or baking pans).

How To Serve

These boats make for a wonderful meal. Two boats are an ideal serving for adults and hungry kids.

You could serve it with a nice green salad and warm bread for the perfect meal.

We love to place them on a large platter and let folks serve themselves. Be sure to hold on to that extra marinara and make a small pool on everyone’s plate to rest the boats on.

Freshly grated parmesan is wonderful to have at the table for additional cheese.

EXPERT TIP: Chopped fresh mozzarella is a wonderful topping, but, for ease, pre-packaged shredded mozzarella is just fine. Freshly grated Parmesan brings it all together!

A person sprinkling shredded mozzarella cheese over the tops of halved zucchinis that have been filled with a sausage and tomato sauce.

Other Wonderful Weeknight Dinner Recipes To Try

There’s nothing better than a home-cooked meal. But, sometimes, you don’t have a lot of time to prepare it. These recipes are family favorites, but are a snap to whip up!

These are all amazing and easy to prepare. But, in the meantime, isn’t this grabbing your attention?

A straight-on view of two white dinner plates filled with two stuffed zucchini boats that are resting on a small layer of marinara sauce.

We love this dish for so many reasons.

It’s easy. The ingredients are humble and wallet-friendly. It combines a vegetable and meat all in one dish. But most of all – it’s incredibly delicious!

And you can be sure that it will be a hit with your entire family! It’s really that good!

A close-up view of two stuffed zucchini boats that are resting on a bed of marinara sauce and have both been partially eaten.

Ready to make the best weeknight dinner on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of an antique platter filled with stuffed zucchini boats that are topped with melty cheese and surrounded by sprigs of parsley.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Stuffed Zucchini Boats

This recipe is dinner perfection. It's easy and hits all the right notes. If you like your zucchini to be extra tender, then pre-bake them for about 10 minutes before adding the sauce. Two boats per serving are filling and so satisfying!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time45 minutes
Total Time1 hour
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American / Italian
Servings: 4
Calories: 487kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large baking dish or 2 9x13 dishes

Ingredients

  • 4 medium zucchini
  • 3 tablespoon olive oil divided
  • Salt and pepper
  • Cooking spray
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 lb Italian sausage
  • 2 cups Marinara sauce plus extra for serving
  • ¼ cup fresh basil chopped
  • 1 cup mozzarella shredded
  • ¼ cup Parmesan cheese grated, plus extra for serving
  • 2 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • Cut the ends off the zucchini and cut them in half, lengthwise. Use a spoon to scoop out the seeds (discard). Brush 2 tablespoon of the oil over the tops of the boats. Liberally season the tops with salt and pepper. Spray the dish (or dishes) with cooking spray and place the boats in the dish, arranging them so they are pressed against each other, allowing them to sit upright.
    4 medium zucchini, 3 tablespoon olive oil, Salt and pepper, Cooking spray
  • Heat the remaining 1 tablespoon oil over medium heat in a medium-size skillet. Add the onion and sauté until soft, about 4 minutes. Add the garlic and cook for another 30 seconds, stirring occasionally.
    1 medium onion, 3 cloves garlic
  • Add the sausage to the pan and use a wooden spatula to break the sausage up. Cook, stirring often, until no longer pink. Stir in the marinara sauce, ½ teaspoon salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper. Bring to a simmer and then stir in the basil. Let simmer for about 10 to 15 minutes.
    1 lb Italian sausage, 2 cups Marinara sauce, ¼ cup fresh basil
  • Spoon the sauce into the zucchini boats (you may have leftover sauce). Sprinkle the mozzarella over the tops and then sprinkle on the grated Parmesan cheese.
    1 cup mozzarella, ¼ cup Parmesan cheese
  • Bake for 30 minutes. If the cheese starts to brown too much on top, loosely cover the dish with foil.
  • Heat about a cup of remaining marinara while the boats are baking.
  • Spoon a small pool of the warmed marinara on each plate and then top with 1 to 2 boats, per person. Garnish with parsley (if desired) and serve with additional grated Parmesan at the table.
    2 tablespoon fresh parsley

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Depending on the size of the zucchini, they will become soft during the baking process, but not mushy at all. They will be a little firm, but still tender. If you prefer very soft zucchini, then pre-heat them in the dishes in the oven for 15 minutes before adding the filling. 
Leftovers are wonderful! Reheat in the oven (covered with foil) at 350°F for 20 minutes, or until heated through. They keep covered, in the fridge, for several days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 487kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 113mg | Sodium: 768mg | Potassium: 967mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1409IU | Vitamin C: 52mg | Calcium: 300mg | Iron: 4mg

Jamaican Jerk Chicken

by 4 Comments

The flavor combinations of this dish are unmatched. Beautiful and delicious all at the same time.

We love Caribbean cuisine. There is usually a little heat matched against a little sweet. The allspice provides an authentic flavor that reflects Jamaica’s grilling method, which is commonly done with pimento (allspice) wood on an open flame. Serve with coconut rice and mango salsa for an unforgettable Caribbean feast.

A white dinner plate filled with a serving of Jamaican jerk chicken that is topped with a mango salsa and resting on a bed of coconut rice.

How To Make Jamaican Jerk Chicken

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Although there are quite a few ingredients needed to create the jerk marinade, none of them are hard to find. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

For the Marinade

Citrus – Orange juice and lemon juice, preferably freshly squeezed.
Vinegar – We recommend apple cider vinegar, but white wine vinegar, red wine vinegar, or even distilled white vinegar would work.
Oil – Vegetable, olive, or canola are all good options.
Brown sugar – Dark or light are both fine.
Ginger – Fresh is best.
Peppers – Scotch bonnet, habanero, or jalapeño. Chopped. Keep the seeds for more heat.
Soy sauce – Regular of low-sodium are both fine.
Seasonings – Salt, pepper, allspice, ground cloves, cinnamon, dried thyme, yellow mustard.

For the Chicken

Chicken – Bone-in, skin-on whole chicken legs are a great option, but all chicken parts will work. We don’t recommend boneless and skinless.
Rice – Coconut rice is the perfect complement to the slight heat from the marinade.
Salsa – Mango is the way to go!

EXPERT TIP: The marinade should resemble thick tomato sauce. If it’s too thick, you can thin it with a little extra orange juice or lime juice. The longer you allow the chicken to chill with the marinade, the better the flavor will be!

A person pouring Jamaican jerk marinade over whole chicken legs in a large glass baking dish.

Tips for Making Perfect Jamaican Jerk Chicken

Marinate for Flavor – For the best flavor, marinate the chicken legs in a homemade jerk marinade for at least 4 to 6 hours, or ideally overnight. Rub the marinade into the chicken, even under the skin, if possible.

Use a Two-Zone Grill Setup – When grilling, create a two-zone setup on your grill by having one side on high heat and the other on low. Start by baking the chicken legs over indirect high heat, then move them to the direct-heat side to get them lightly charred.

Baste While Grilling – During the grilling process, baste the chicken legs with additional jerk marinade or a mixture of oil and lime juice to keep them moist and enhance the flavor. This also helps develop a delicious glaze on the skin.

Check for Doneness – Use a meat thermometer to ensure the chicken is cooked perfectly; the internal temperature should reach 165°F (75°C). Allow the chicken to rest for about 5-10 minutes after grilling to let the juices redistribute, resulting in tender and flavorful meat.

EXPERT TIP: Allowing the chicken the chill in the marinade for at least 4 to 6 hours is crucial to achieving a deeply flavorful jerk taste. Even better, let it marinate overnight.

An overhead view of uncooked whole chicken legs that are covered in jerk marinade in a large glass baking dish.

How To Serve

This dish is stunning when the chicken is placed on a large serving platter.

For a beautiful presentation, cut a few limes in half and place them on the grill, cut side down.

And the coconut rice and homemade mango salsa bring it all together. It’s great for a delicious meal at home with the family, but, it’s also ideal for serving to guests.

EXPERT TIP: Take extra care when placing the chicken on the direct-heat side. If you want more char on the skin side, you may need to liberally coat the grates with cooking spray, or oil, because the skin will likely stick and tear off. We don’t grill over direct heat with the skin side down. The skin will still crisp up without touching the grates.

A close-up view of whole chicken legs that are being grilled and lightly charred on a gas grill.

Other Caribbean-Style Recipes to Try

Can’t get to the Caribbean? Try these delicious recipes and they will transport you and your family to the Islands!

These are all amazing. But, in the meantime, isn’t this chicken dinner calling your name?

An overhead view of a large white platter that is filled with a row of lightly charred Jamaican jerk chicken with a bowl of mango salsa next to the whole chicken legs.

The depth of flavor with this jerk chicken is nothing short of amazing. If desired, you could do this with pork, too. Jerk pork chops are amazing!

We highly recommend serving the dish with the easy coconut rice and mango salsa.

This dish is as beautiful in presentation as it is in taste! Perfect for serving guests!

A person using a large silver serving spoon to scatter homemade mango salsa over the tops of whole jerk chicken legs on a large white platter.

Ready to make the best chicken dinner this side of Montego Bay? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A white dinner plate filled with a serving of Jamaican jerk chicken that is topped with a mango salsa and resting on a bed of coconut rice.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Jamaican Jerk Chicken

This Jamaican Jerk Chicken is deeply flavorful and beautiful in presentation. Be sure to allow the chicken to chill in the marinade for no less than 4 hours, preferably overnight. The coconut rice and mango salsa bring it all together.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time40 minutes
Chill time6 hours
Total Time6 hours 55 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Jamaican
Servings: 6
Calories: 368kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup lime juice extra, if needed
  • 1 tablespoon orange juice
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • 2 teaspoon soy sauce
  • ½ cup brown sugar light or dark
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger chopped
  • 4 Scotch bonnets stemmed, roughly chopped
  • 2 teaspoon allspice
  • 1 teaspoon ground cloves
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 tablespoon ground mustard
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 scallions roughly chopped
  • 6 whole chicken legs
  • coconut rice for serving
  • mango salsa for serving

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients (except chicken, rice, and salsa) in your food processor. Process until smooth. The consistency should be like thick tomato sauce. If too thick, add a little extra lime or orange juice.
    ¼ cup lime juice, 1 tablespoon orange juice, 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoon vegetable oil, 2 teaspoon soy sauce, ½ cup brown sugar, 1 tablespoon fresh ginger, 4 Scotch bonnets, 2 teaspoon allspice, 1 teaspoon ground cloves, 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon, 2 teaspoon dried thyme, 1 tablespoon ground mustard, 1 teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 8 scallions
  • Place the chicken in a large dish and cover with the marinade. (you may need to use two dishes). Cover with plastic wrap and chill in the refrigerator for no less than 4 hours or up to overnight.
    6 whole chicken legs
  • Set up your grill to a 2-zone heat set-up with no heat on one side and direct heat on the other side. Place the chicken, skin-side down, on the no-heat side. Close the grill lid and cook for 15 to 20 minutes, basting with extra marinade a time or two.
  • Lift the grill lid and carefully flip the chicken over, still on the no-heat side. Close the lid and cook for another 15 to 20 minutes, or until an instant-read thermometer reaches 165 to 175°F.
  • Carefully move the chicken to the direct heat side and cook until lightly charred, about 3 to 5 minutes. See NOTES about cooking the skin on the direct-heat side.
  • Remove the chicken from the grill and serve immediately with the coconut rice and mango salsa.
    coconut rice, mango salsa

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The peppers will give the marinade some heat, which is traditional for jerk. It's not overly spicy at all. However, if you want very little spice, do your best to remove any seeds from the peppers. We highly recommend using protective gloves when handling the peppers. If not, be sure to wash your hands with warm water and soap before proceeding. 
Take extra care when grilling the chicken skin-side down. If you place the chicken (skin-side down) on the direct heat side, the skin may stick to the grates. We recommend spraying the grates liberally with oil bef 

Nutrition

Calories: 368kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 120mg | Sodium: 618mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 309IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg

Easy Coconut Rice

by Leave a Comment

We love all kinds of rice, but, if we had to pick our favorite, this would top this list.

Jasmine rice is easy to find and the flavor and texture are fluffy and fragrant. The unsweetened coconut milk can be found in the Asian section of your supermarket, and the two combined with a little water and salt make an absolutely delicious serving of rice. Perfect for Caribbean dishes, seafood, and beyond. And it is so easy!

An overhead view of easy coconut rice that is in an orange serving bowl and has two lime wedges off to the side and a small sprig of cilantro resting on top.

How To Make Easy Coconut Rice

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Are are only a handful of ingredients needed for this dish and they are easy to find. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Rice – Jasmine is our preference, however, you could substitute basmati or even long-grain white. Check the package if you’re not using Jasmine, it may require more water and a longer cooking time.
Coconut milk – Be sure to get unsweetened. You can find it in the Asian section of most well-stocked supermarkets. Or, you can order it online.
Seasoning – Kosher salt.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to stir the milk, water, and salt often as it comes to a boil. This will keep the rice from sticking the the bottom of the pan while it’s over high heat.

A person pouring unsweetened coconut milk from a small glass milk jug into a medium-sized silver saucepan that is filled with uncooked Jasmine rice.

What To Serve with Easy Coconut Rice

This rice is a wonderful side to Caribbean, Thai, and Indian dishes. It’s also good as a side dish to any grilled meat, seafood, or veggies. Here are dishes that go perfectly with the rice:

A close-up view of a silver saucepan that is filled with easy coconut rice that has been cooked and stirred with a wooden spoon.

There are just so many reasons to love this rice.

It’s so easy. It’s versatile.

But mostly, it’s incredibly delicious.

A close-up view of a wooden spoon that is holding a serving of easy coconut rice over a saucepan that is filled with the same rice.

Ready to make the coconut rice this side of Jamaica? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of easy coconut rice that is in an orange serving bowl and has two lime wedges off to the side and a small sprig of cilantro resting on top.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Easy Coconut Rice

This rice is so simple but the flavors are amazing. The coconut milk complements the fragrant Jasmine perfectly. If desired, add a bay leave, or a couple of whole cloves for even deeper flavor.
Prep Time5 minutes
Cook Time18 minutes
Total Time23 minutes
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: Asian / Thai, Caribbean
Servings: 4
Calories: 307kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 medium-sized saucepan with lid

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Jasmine rice
  • 1 cup unsweetened coconut milk
  • 1 cup water
  • 1 teaspoon salt

Instructions

  • Add all of the ingredients to the saucepan and stir to combine. Bring to a boil over high heat, stirring often.
  • Reduce the heat to low and cover the pan. After about 10 minutes, give the rice a good stir, just to make sure it's not sticking to the pan.
  • After a total of 15 to 18 minutes, remove the lid and stir to fluff the rice. Serve at once, or keep covered for up to 1 hour. Leftovers will keep for up to 5 days (in the fridge).

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
For extra fluffy rice, place the rice in a bowl and cover with cool water. Use your hands to swirl the rice around until the water is cloudy. Carefully drain away the water, using your hand to keep the rice in the bowl. Repeat 2 more times, then allow the rice to soak for 15 to 20 minutes. Drain, and then proceed with the recipe. This isn't 100% necessary, but, if you have the time, it will make the rice more fluffy. 

Nutrition

Calories: 307kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 211mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

Homemade Mango Salsa

by Leave a Comment

This salsa works as a delicious dip, but it also adds an amazing punch of flavor to prepared meats and seafood.

Being from Texas, we’re kind of snobs when it comes to salsa. We practically judge the quality of a Tex-Mex restaurant by the quality of their salsa. It took us a while to get on the fruit salsa train, but once we made this version, we became believers. It’s so fresh, vibrant, and colorful! And easy to prepare!

An overhead straight-down view of a small white bowl filled with fresh mango salsa with tortilla chips and limes wedges surrounding it.

How to Make Homemade Mango Salsa

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

What really makes the salsa sing is how fresh it is. We highly recommend using fresh fruit, however, frozen (that has been thawed) could work in a pinch. But, really try and go with fresh! Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Fresh mango – See the video on how to easily cut the mango up. You could also go with fresh pineapple, papaya, peaches, or a combination of any (or all) of them.
Red bell pepper – Stems and seeds removed and chopped. Green, yellow, or orange bell peppers are all perfectly fine options.
Red onion – Finely chopped. You could substitute green onions (scallions), too.
Garlic – Finely minced.
Peppers – We recommend a seeded and finely chopped jalapeño, but you could also with serrano or habanero peppers (leave seeds in for more spice).
Cilantro – Freshly chopped
Citrus – Freshly squeezed orange juice and lime juice.
Salt – A healthy pinch of coarse Kosher salt is best.

EXPERT TIP: Take extra care when cutting the outer ‘cheeks’ from the core of the mango. Only peel a portion of the mango. The flesh can be slippery. Be sure to cut away from your hands.

An overhead view of fresh mango that has been cut into bite-sized pieces on a cutting board with a large Japanese-style knife next to the cut fruit.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Mango Salsa

Choose Ripe Mangos – Select ripe, sweet mangos for the best flavor. Look for fruit that gives slightly when pressed and has a fragrant aroma. The flesh should be vibrant orange or yellow, indicating ripeness.

Balance Flavors – Combine the sweetness of the mango with acidity and heat. Add lime juice for a zesty kick and finely chopped jalapeños or red onions for a bit of spice. Taste as you go to find the perfect balance that suits your palate.

Incorporate Fresh Herbs – Fresh herbs like cilantro or mint can elevate the salsa, adding depth and freshness. Chop them finely and mix them in just before serving to maintain their vibrant flavor.

Let It Marinate – Allow your mango salsa to sit for at least 30 minutes before serving. This resting time lets the flavors meld together, enhancing the overall taste and making it even more delicious. Store it in the refrigerator to keep it fresh until you’re ready to enjoy it!

An overhead view of a large glass bowl that is holding small piles of chopped mango, red bell pepper, red onion, jalapeño, garlic, and cilantro.

Other Amazing Salsa Recipes to Try

If you love salsa as much as we do, you are going to flip for these homemade varieties!

Restaurant-Quality Tex-Mex Salsa
Roasted Tomato Salsa
Salsa Verde
Roasted Corn Salsa
Santa Maria Salsa (with Grilled Trip Tip)

These are all amazing in their own way, but, in the meantime, isn’t this salsa calling your name?

A close-up view of mango salsa that is in a white bowl with tortilla chips and lime wedges surrounding it.

How To Serve

This salsa is so refreshing and perfect for serving with warm crispy tortilla chips and an ice-cold beer or iced tea.

To make your own chips, simply use a pizza cutter to cut a soft corn tortilla into triangles. Fry in hot oil (350°F) in a sturdy skillet until crispy. Drain on paper towels and sprinkle with salt.

This salsa is also amazing when served over grilled salmon, jerk chicken, or steak. It’s amazing alongside an omelette and bacon, too! Just look at this Jamaican Jerk Chicken with Homemade Mango Salsa!

A person using a large silver serving spoon to scatter homemade mango salsa over the tops of whole jerk chicken legs on a large white platter.

Ready to make the best salsa this side of the Caribbean? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of mango salsa that is in a white bowl with tortilla chips and lime wedges surrounding it.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Homemade Mango Salsa

This homemade mango salsa is so refreshing and vibrant. You can go with your favorite fruits, including mango, but also pineapple, papaya, peaches, or a combination of them all. The salsa will stay fresh and delicious chilled in the fridge for up to 3 days.
Prep Time15 minutes
Chill time15 minutes
Total Time30 minutes
Course: Appetizer or Condiment
Cuisine: Caribbean
Servings: 8
Calories: 39kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 2 medium mangos peeled and cut into bite-size chunks
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and diced
  • ¼ cup red onion finely chopped
  • 1 jalapeño seeded and chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoon fresh orange juice
  • 2 tablespoon fresh lime juice
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Mix all of the ingredients together in a large bowl and chill for 15 minutes, or up to 3 days.
    2 medium mangos, 1 red bell pepper, ¼ cup red onion, 1 jalapeño, 2 cloves garlic, 2 tablespoon fresh orange juice, 2 tablespoon fresh lime juice, ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You can use frozen fruit (thawed), but fresh is so much better. See the video on how to carefully cut up a mango. Make sure the mango is ripe. It will be red-ish and slightly soft to the touch. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 3 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 39kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 74mg | Potassium: 133mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1045IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Cheese-Stuffed Smoked Meatloaf

by 2 Comments

When we decided to start adding smoker recipes to the blog, we knew we had to start with this classic.

If you love meatloaf as much as we do, you are going to flip for this smoked version. The smokiness works perfectly with the juicy seasoned beef and pork, and the melty Fontina cheese in the middle puts it over the top. This is meatloaf like no other meatloaf. And it’s off-the-charts delicious. And if you’re looking for another smoked recipe, check out our St. Louis-Style Smoked Ribs! 

A close-up view of a slice of cheese-stuffed smoked meatloaf resting on a pile of mashed potatoes on a black plate.

How To Make Cheese-Stuffed Smoked Meatloaf

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video! Thank you!

The Tools and Ingredients You Will Need

As far as smokers go, we can’t rave enough about our electric Smokin’ Tex smoker. They ship across the U.S. and we are excited to offer you a 10% discount! Simply click here to learn more. Be sure to add promo code: LOON10!.

A meat thermometer is critical to ensure the meatloaf is perfectly cooked. We’ve partnered with ThermoPro and click here to enjoy major discounts via How To Feed a Loon!

The Tools

Smoker – Electric, Pellet, or Egg
Thermometer – An instant-read is perfect.
Grill pan – Not 100% necessary, but it helps the meatloaf to cook evenly.

The Ingredients

Ground beef – We recommend 85% lean, but 90% will work, too.
Ground pork – You could also use Italian sausage (no casings) for an even bigger punch of flavor.
Onion – Chopped
Breadcrumbs – We use Panko, but regular breadcrumbs will work, too. If using fresh, let the bread sit out for a few hours first.
Tomato sauce – You’ll need some for the meatloaf and the glaze topping.
Balsamic – Go with aged, if possible. You’ll also need some for the meatloaf and then again for the glaze.
Worcestershire sauce – You could substitute low-sodium soy, if necessary.
Herbs – Thyme and parsley. Fresh is best, but dried will work, too. If using dried, go with 1 teaspoon each.
Parmesan cheese – Grated.
Seasoning – Salt and pepper.
Cheese – Any melting cheese will work. We go with Fontina, but cheddar, Monterey Jack, or mozzarella would work just fine.

EXPERT TIP: Make sure the cheese doesn’t reach the side of the lower layer of the meat mixture. If you don’t want to stuff the meatloaf with cheese, simply omit it. The meatloaf will still be amazing.

A person layering two thick slices of Fontina cheese into a loaf pan that the bottom has been packed with an uncooked meatloaf mixture.

Tips for Making a Perfect Cheese-Stuffed Smoked Meatloaf

Choose the Right Ground Meat – For a flavorful and juicy meatloaf, use a combination of ground beef and pork. The beef adds richness, while the pork contributes moisture, ensuring a tender texture that holds up well during the smoking process.

Layer the Cheese with Care – Make a pocket in the center of the meatloaf to hold the stuffing securely, ensuring it stays intact while cooking.

Control the Smoking Temperature – Keep your smoker to a steady temperature of around 225°F to 250°F (107°C to 121°C) for optimal smoking. This low-and-slow method allows the meatloaf to absorb the smoky flavors while cooking evenly throughout.

Use a Meat Thermometer – To ensure your meatloaf is cooked perfectly, use a meat thermometer to check for doneness; it should reach an internal temperature of 160°F (71°C). This will help you avoid overcooking while ensuring the cheese is melted and the meat is safe to eat.

EXPERT TIP: You don’t have to place the meatloaf in a loaf pan, you can form the loaf with your hands. However, the uniform size from shaping it in the loaf pan is not only attractive, it helps the loaf cook more evenly throughout.

An overhead view of a rectangular loaf of an uncooked meatloaf resting in a circular grill pan that has holes throughout it.

How To Serve

This meatloaf is screaming for a side of best-ever mashed potatoes. Slow-cooked green beans (simmered with a ham bone, ham hock, or even bacon) are also a perfect side dish.

We recommend letting the meatloaf rest for about 5 minutes after it comes out of the smoker. This lets the juices re-distribute. Don’t wait too long, though. You want the cheese to be nice and melty.

And in the unlikely event you have leftovers, this sliced meatloaf makes the world’s best sandwiches. Heat the slices in the oven or microwave, toast a sub bun, add a little mayonnaise, and top the sandwich with a slice of provolone. Stick under the broiler to melt the cheese. Sandwich heaven!

EXPERT TIP: You’ll want to baste the meatloaf with about half of the glaze after about 3½ hours. Save extra for drizzling over the sliced meatloaf at the table.

A close-up view of a cooked cheese-stuffed smoked meatloaf in a grill pan inside the smoker and a person is basting the top of the loaf with a balsamic glaze.

Other Recipes with Ground Beef To Try

Here is a collection of recipes using the ever-versatile ground beef:

These are all amazing. But, in the meantime, isn’t this epic meatloaf calling your name?

A straight-on view of a smoked meatloaf that has the end cut away and melty cheese on the inside of the loaf is visible and oozing down the front of the sliced loaf.

This meatloaf is the king of all meatloafs.

The smokiness and melty cheesy interior puts it in a class all of its own.

And don’t forget about meatloaf sandwiches the next day. Epic hardly describes it!

A straight-on view of a cheese-stuffed smoked meatloaf with several slices visible on a large wooden cutting board.

Ready to make the best smoked meatloaf in the world? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a slice of cheese-stuffed smoked meatloaf resting on a pile of mashed potatoes on a black plate.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Cheese-Stuffed Smoked Meatloaf

This meatloaf is amazing in every way. Smoking adds an incredible depth of flavor. The melty cheese in the center puts it over the top!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time3 hours 30 minutes
Resting Time10 minutes
Total Time3 hours 55 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 591kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1½ lbs ground beef 85% lean
  • ½ lb ground pork
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 1 cup Panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 cup tomato sauce divided
  • 3 tablespoon balsamic vinegar divided
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon thyme fresh, chopped
  • 1 tablespoon Italian parsley fresh, chopped, plus extra for garnish (optional)
  • ¼ cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 5 oz Fontina cheese sliced

Instructions

  • Line a loaf pan with plastic wrap.
  • In a large bowl, combine the beef, pork, onions, breadcrumbs, ½ cup tomato sauce, 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar, eggs, Worcestershire sauce, thyme, parsley, Parmesan, salt, and pepper. Mix until fully combined.
    1½ lbs ground beef, ½ lb ground pork, 1 cup onion, 1 cup Panko breadcrumbs, 1 cup tomato sauce, 3 tablespoon balsamic vinegar, 2 large eggs, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon thyme, 1 tablespoon Italian parsley, ¼ cup Parmesan cheese, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Pack half of the mixture into the plastic wrap-lined loaf pan.
  • Place the cheese pieces in the middle of the meat mixture. Top with the remaining meat and press to compact.
    5 oz Fontina cheese
  • Add wood chips to the wood box and place it in your smoker.
  • Invert the loaf pan onto a grill pan and carefully remove the meatloaf from the pan. Remove the plastic wrap and discard.
  • Smoke at 225°F for 3 to 3½ hours, or until a meat thermometer inserted into the loaf reaches 155 to 165°F.  
  • Meanwhile, in a small bowl, combine ½-cup tomato sauce and 2 tablespoon balsamic vinegar. Brush the mixture all over the meatloaf. Smoke for another 30 minutes to 1 hour. Remove from the smoker and let rest for 10 minutes. Carefully transfer the meatloaf to a cutting board or platter. Slice and serve at once, with extra sauce on the side. Garnish with chopped parsley, if desired.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
You can use all beef, or a combination of beef, pork, and even ground veal. You'll need 2 lbs of ground meat. 
After you've inverted the loaf pan and pulled away the plastic wrap, be sure the sides are sealed, especially in the middle where the cheese is. It's okay if some of the cheese oozes out during the smoking process. 
Leftovers keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. Reheat in the oven or in the microwave. Leftovers make AMAZING sandwiches. 

Nutrition

Calories: 591kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 200mg | Sodium: 785mg | Potassium: 681mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 633IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 256mg | Iron: 4mg

Pasta with Roasted Tomatoes and Pesto Chicken

by 8 Comments

Pasta with Roasted Tomatoes and Pesto Chicken is an amazing dish. Roasting the tomatoes concentrates the tomato flavor and makes them melt-in-your-mouth delicious. The grilled easy pesto sauce chicken perfectly matches the tomatoes and the garlic white wine sauce. The tomatoes take a few hours to roast, but they can be done well in advance, which makes preparation a snap!

Two white pasta bowls sitting next to each other both filled with a serving of pasta with roasted tomatoes and pesto chicken.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 The Ingredients

Simple, everyday ingredients like roasted tomatoes, pesto, and chicken combine effortlessly to create a deeply flavorful and satisfying pasta dish. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for pasta with roasted tomatoes and pesto chicken on a white background including a bowls of uncooked chicken thighs and Roma tomatoes, herbs, pasta, and seasonings.

🌿 Substitutions and Variations

  • Chicken – We love the taste of boneless chicken thighs, but you can certainly go with boneless chicken breasts. Skin-on, bone-in thighs are wonderful, too; leave the meat on the bone. If desired, toss cubed ham at the very end for even more flavor.
  • Tomatoes – Any type of tomato will work for this dish. Romas roast nicely, but you can’t go wrong with vine-ripe tomatoes. Make sure they are red and juicy. If you are pressed for time, skip the roasting and add top-notch canned tomatoes, such as San Marzano.
  • Seasonings – Fresh herbs are best, but dried will work, too. Use any of the following herbs for excellent results: Thyme, basil, parsley, or marjoram.
  • Wine – If you prefer not to cook with alcohol, simply increase the amount of broth.

See the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make Pasta with Roasted Tomatoes and Pesto Chicken

Three rows of roasted Roma tomato halves on a white silicone matt sprinkled with salt, pepper, and dried thyme.
  1. Step 1: Place the halved tomatoes on a baking sheet lined with parchment (or a silicone mat), season with salt, pepper, and thyme, drizzle with oil, and roast for 2½ hours at 300°F.
A person using a pair of metal tongs to turn over chicken thighs that are being grilled on a hot gas grill.
  1. Step 2: Brush the chicken with oil, season with salt and pepper, and grill until fully cooked.
Grilled pieces of chicken that are being tossed by two wooden spoons in homemade pesto sauce in a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 3: Cut the chicken into bite-size pieces and toss with the easy pesto sauce.
A person transferring uncooked penne pasta from a large glass measuring cup into a pasta pot filled with boiling water.
  1. Step 4: Boil the pasta until just al dente.
A large black cast-iron skillet filled with sautéed onion and garlic and is simmering in white wine, broth, and Parmesan cheese.
  1. Step 5: Sauté the onion and garlic, and then simmer with the white wine, broth, and sprinkle in the cheese.
A large black cast-iron skillet filled with cooked pasta, pesto chicken and roasted Roma tomatoes.
  1. Step 6: Stir in the tomatoes and chicken.

Expert Tip

To roast the tomatoes, we line our baking sheet with a silicone mat for even baking. However, parchment paper or foil will work just fine, as well. Remember, the tomatoes can be baked ahead of time, up to 12 hours in advance.

🍽️ How To Serve

  • This pasta is a filling dish and can be served with just some warm, easy skillet dinner rolls and a nice white wine, such as Chardonnay, or a robust red wine such as Zinfandel.
  • For the perfect Italian feast, we love to cut a head of cold iceberg lettuce into fourths and then top each wedge with homemade blue cheese dressing, crumbled cooked bacon, halved cherry tomatoes, and a sprinkle of finely chopped red onion. It’s the perfect start to the feast.
  • Cheesy garlic bread is a wonderful addition to the feast, too. Finish up with a ricotta cheesecake for the end of a stunning Italian-themed dinner party or a fun night at home with your loved ones.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use store-bought pesto for Pasta with Roasted Tomatoes and Pesto Chicken?

Yes, store-bought pesto works well and saves time, but easy homemade pesto can add a fresher, more vibrant flavor if you prefer.

How do I prevent the chicken from drying out while grilling?

Coat it in olive oil, season it, and then grill it over medium-high heat, turning once, until just cooked through to keep it juicy and flavorful. Use a digital thermometer to ensure you’ve reached an internal temperature of 160°F.

Can I roast the tomatoes ahead of time?

Absolutely! Roasted tomatoes can be prepared a day in advance and stored in the refrigerator, which actually helps deepen their flavor before combining with the pasta.

A large black cast-iron skillet filled with pasta with roasted tomatoes and pesto chicken and a large wooden spoon next to it.

🍝 Other Amazing Pasta Recipes

Ready to make a pasta dish that will rival your favorite Italian joint in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A large cast-iron skillet filled with pasta with roasted tomatoes and pesto chicken.
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Pasta with Roasted Tomatoes and Pesto Chicken

Roasting the tomatoes concentrates the tomato flavor and makes them melt-in-your-mouth delicious. You can make the pesto from scratch or go with store-bought, either way is perfectly fine. Be sure to save some pasta water to add to the skillet to get the perfect consistency. Leftovers heat up beautifully with a little extra broth and are amazing!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time3 hours 30 minutes
Total Time3 hours 45 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Italian
Servings: 6
Calories: 591kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Baking sheet lined with a silicone mat, parchment paper, or foil.
  • 1 large (12") skillet

Ingredients

  • 1½ lbs Roma tomatoes halved
  • 3 tablespoon Olive oil divided
  • Salt and pepper
  • 1 tablespoon thyme dried
  • 4 chicken thighs boneless, skinless
  • ⅓ cup pesto sauce
  • 3 cups penne pasta
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup white wine
  • 1 cup chicken broth
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • ⅓ cup parmesan cheese grated, plus extra for garnish
  • 2 tablespoon parsley fresh, chopped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 300°F.
  • Place the halved tomatoes, cut side up, on the baking sheet (lined with a silicone mat, parchment paper, or foil). Drizzle the tomatoes with olive oil, then sprinkle them with salt, pepper, and dried thyme. Bake them for 2 hours. Carefully flip the tomatoes over and bake for another 30 minutes. Remove from the oven. Use immediately, or set aside for up to 12 hours.
    1½ lbs Roma tomatoes, 3 tablespoon Olive oil, Salt and pepper, 1 tablespoon thyme
  • Bring a pot of salted water to a boil.
  • Turn your grill to medium-high heat. Brush olive oil all over the chicken thighs and then sprinkle them with salt and pepper. Grill them until lightly charred and fully cooked with an internal temperature of 165°F. Cut them into bite-sized pieces and toss them in a medium-sized bowl with the pesto sauce. Set aside.
    4 chicken thighs, ⅓ cup pesto sauce
  • Add the pasta to the boiling water and cook until al dente, usually about 10 to 12 minutes. Drain, saving about 1 cup of the pasta water.
    3 cups penne pasta
  • Meanwhile, in a large skillet, heat 2 tablespoons of olive oil over medium heat. Add the onion and sauté until soft, about 4 minutes. Add the garlic and sauté for 30 seconds to one minute. Add the wine and let it simmer for about 1 minute. Add the chicken broth and simmer until reduced by about half, usually about 10 minutes (just long enough for the pasta to cook).
    1 cup onion, 4 cloves garlic, ¼ cup white wine, 1 cup chicken broth
  • Stir in 1 teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon pepper, red pepper flakes, the butter, and the Parmesan cheese, stirring often to prevent the cheese from sticking to the bottom of the pan. Gently stir the chicken and cooked pasta. Stir until fully mixed. Next, gently stir in the tomatoes, being careful not to break them apart. Add about ½ cup of the reserved pasta water and let simmer lightly for a few minutes.
    ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter, ⅓ cup parmesan cheese
  • Serve at once with extra Parmesan cheese and chopped parsley for garnish (if using).
    2 tablespoon parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
The tomatoes can be roasted up to 12 hours in advance. Halved cherry tomatoes can be substituted, but they only need to roast for about 20 to 25 minutes in a 400°F oven. Drizzle with olive oil, salt, pepper, and dried thyme. 
If you don’t have a grill, you can sear the chicken in a large skillet with oil until cooked through, or bake in a 350°F oven for about 20 to 25 minutes, until cooked through to 165°F. 
Leftovers are wonderful. Simply reheat in a skillet with a few splashes of chicken broth. They will keep covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. The dish can be frozen for 2 to 3 months. Allow to thaw completely before heating on the stove with more broth. 

Nutrition

Calories: 591kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 90mg | Sodium: 436mg | Potassium: 634mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1660IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 138mg | Iron: 2mg

Homemade Coconut Cream Pie

by 4 Comments

Coconut cream pie with a fluffy whipped cream topping is a delightful treat that perfectly balances creamy coconut flavor with a light, airy texture. The easy homemade crust adds a deliciously buttery crunch, making each slice a heavenly experience.

A slice of homemade coconut cream pie on a white dessert plate with the pie behind it.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥥 The Ingredients

The simple ingredients blend seamlessly to create a rich, creamy pie that is both indulgent and deliciously satisfying. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement view ingredients for coconut cream pie arranged on a white background, including a pile of shredded coconut, a a jug of heavy cream, milk, a jar of vanilla extract, sugar, cornstarch, and a pre-baked pie crust, all neatly organized for easy preparation.

🍶 Substitutions and Variations

  • Crust – Our homemade pie dough is easy and utilizes your food processor. However, store-bought is perfectly acceptable. You’ll need to blind bake the crust if it’s homemade or purchased. See Step 1 in Recipe Card.
  • Dairy – We go with a combination of half and half and heavy cream for the perfect texture. For a lighter version, you can use only half and half, of part half and half and part whole milk. We don’t recommend low-fat (or skim) milk for this recipe.
  • Flavor enhancers – Go with a quality vanilla extract for the best flavor. You can bump up the coconut flavor and add 1 teaspoon of coconut extract to the filling.
  • Eggs – You’ll only need the yolks for the filling. If desired, save the egg whites and opt for a meringue topping. See our Lemon Merinuge Pie for example.

How To Make Homemade Coconut Cream Pie

A pie crust that has been par-baked in a white pie dish.
  1. Step 1: Fit the pie dough into the pie dish, pierce with a fork, fill with weights, and blind bake. 
A person pouring cream into a saucepan filled with a mixture of sugar and cornstarch.
  1. Step 2: In a saucepan, whisk together the sugar and cornstarch and then stir in the half and half. 
A person using a wooden spatula to stir a vanilla custard sauce in a saucepan.
  1. Step 3: Heat, stirring often, until thickened.
A person pouring a hot custard into a glass bowl filled with egg yolks.
  1. Step 4: Temper the egg yolks with 1 cup of the cream mixture. 
A person pouring tempered eggs and cream into a saucepan filled with more hot cream.
  1. Step 5: Return to the saucepan and simmer for 2 minutes
A person pouring toasted coconut flakes from a glass bowl into a saucepan with custard that is being stirred with a whisk.
  1. Step 6: Remove from heat and stir in the coconut, butter, and vanilla extract. 

Expert Tip

To toast the coconut, spread the sweetened flakes onto a baking sheet and place in an oven preheated to 350°F. Toast until golden brown (but not burned!). Stir a time or two. This usually only takes a few minutes. Keep an eye on it!

😋 Finishing the Pie

Coconut cream pie filling being poured into a baked pie crust in a white pie dish.
  1. Step 7: Transfer to the pie dish, cover with plastic wrap, and chill.
A silver bowl filled with whipped cream with two beaters that have been raised from the whipped cream above it.
  1. Step 8: Beat the cream, sugar, and vanilla until soft peaks are formed.
A person using an offset spatula to spread whipped cream over the top of a chilled coconut cream pie.
  1. Step 3: Spread the whipped cream over the top of the chilled filling
A person sprinkling toasted coconut flakes over the top of a coconut cream pie.
  1. Step 4: Top with toasted coconut. 

Expert Tip

If using the whipped cream topping, allow the filling to fully set and chill in the fridge before spreading it onto the top of the pie.

🥚How To Make a Meringue Topping

If you prefer to make a meringue topping, it’s not difficult to prepare.

  1. First, allow the egg white (from four eggs) to sit at room temperature for about 30 minutes.
  2. In a large measuring cup, whisk together ½ cup water with 2 teaspoon cornstarch. Microwave until very hot, usually about 1 minute. Stir.
  3. Add 1 teaspoon vanilla and ½ teaspoon cream of tartar to the egg whites and use a hand mixer to beat them on HIGH until stiff peaks form.
  4. Add ½ cup sugar, 1 tablespoon at a time, beating on HIGH.
  5. Gradually beat in the warm cornstarch mixture until stiff, glossy peaks form.
  6. IMPORTANT: Add the meringue to the surface of the filling while it is still hot.
  7. Bake for 20 minutes.

Frequently Asked Questions

How far in advance can Coconut Cream Pie be made?

24 hours is best, covered and refrigerated.

Can Coconut Cream Pie be frozen?

We don’t recommend it. The custard will most likely break after thawing.

How Do You Make Coconut Cream Pie gluten-free?

Yes. Purchase a gluten-free pie crust, or make the pie crust using gluten-free flour (almond flour). The filling is gluten-free.

🥧 Other Amazing Pie Recipes

Ready to make the best pie in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A slice of homemade coconut cream pie on a white dessert plate with the pie behind it.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Coconut Cream Pie

Coconut Cream Pie is a pie lover's dream come true. Be sure to heat and stir the custard until it is nicely thickened. Then you will need to let the pie chill for a minimum of 4 to 6 hours. Overnight is best. See the blog post for instructions on how to make a meringue topping.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Chill time4 hours
Total Time4 hours 45 minutes
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 494kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 9-inch pie dish
  • Electric hand-mixer

Ingredients

For the Pie

  • 1 pie dough for 9-inch pie dish
  • ¾ cup sugar
  • 3 tablespoon cornstarch
  • 2½ cups half and half
  • 4 egg yolks
  • 1⅓ cup toasted sweetened coconut flakes divided
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1½ teaspoon vanilla extract

For the Whipped Topping

  • 1½ cup heavy cream
  • 3 tablespoon sugar
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 450°F. Prepare the pie dough and then roll it out to about 12 inches. Shape into a 9-inch pie dish. Gently puncture the dough with a fork on the bottom of the dish and along the sides. Trim and then flute the edges of the dough (see video for reference). Place parchment paper (or foil) over the dough and fill with pie weights, dried beans, or rice. Bake for 6 minutes. Remove the weights and parchment paper and bake for another 8 minutes, or until lightly browned. Allow to cool on a rack while you prepare the filling.
    1 pie dough
  • In a medium-sized saucepan (2 to 3 quart), whisk together the sugar and cornstarch. Gradually whisk in the half and half until fully combined. Place over medium-high heat, stirring constantly, until thickened (the consistency of fairly thick gravy). It should be lightly bubbling. Reduce the heat and cook, stirring constantly, for another 2 minutes. Turn off the heat.
    ¾ cup sugar, 3 tablespoon cornstarch, 2½ cups half and half
  • Place the egg yolks in a medium-sized bowl. Pour about 1 cup of the hot cream mixture into the egg yolks, whisking constantly. Pour the egg yolk/cream mixture back into the saucepan and turn the heat to medium. Bring to a mild simmer, and cook, stirring often, for about 2 minutes. Turn off the heat.
    4 egg yolks
  • Stir in 1 cup of the toasted coconut flakes, butter, and vanilla extract. Stir until completely combined. Transfer to the partially baked pie crust. Cover with plastic wrap, gently pressing the wrap to the top surface of the filling. Chill for 4 to 6 hours, or overnight.
    1⅓ cup toasted sweetened coconut flakes, 1 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Chill a bowl in the freezer for about 15 minutes. Add the heavy cream, sugar, and vanilla. Beat with a hand mixer on HIGH until soft peaks form, about 4 minutes.
    1½ cup heavy cream, 3 tablespoon sugar, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Remove the plastic from the pie and spread the whipped topping over the top. Sprinkle the remaining ⅓-cup of toasted coconut flakes. Serve at once, or keep chilled until ready to serve.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video near the top of the recipe for visual guidance.
Be sure to stir the cream/sugar/cornstarch mixture long enough until it is thickened. It should be near the consistency of gravy (not a thin gravy). Keep the heat at medium to medium-high. Stir constantly, especially along the bottom edge of the pan, so it won’t burn. If you get a few brown spots from the sugar crystallizing, don’t worry about it. Just don’t let it burn. 
See the blog post for how to make a meringue topping, if you prefer. Just remember the meringue topping must go onto the filling while the filling is still hot.
The pie will keep in the fridge for up to 5 to 7 days. 

Nutrition

Calories: 494kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 178mg | Sodium: 150mg | Potassium: 175mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 28g | Vitamin A: 1097IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 127mg | Iron: 1mg

Mexican Shrimp Ceviche

by 1 Comment

There is so much to love about this beloved seafood appetizer. It’s beautiful. Festive. And incredibly delicious.

The process of “cooking” the raw shrimp in fresh lime juice is amazing. You will not believe the flavor and texture. It’s not fishy tasting at all and the shrimp is about as succulent as you will ever find. It’s so good! The taste and presentation will transport you to the beautiful sunny beaches down Mexico Way.

A straight-on view of a small glass bowl that is filled with a serving of Mexican shrimp ceviche and is on a green cocktail plate with corn tortilla chips and a silver spoon on it.

How To Make Mexican Shrimp Ceviche

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Shrimp – Fresh is best. If frozen, go with a top-notch seafood provider. We use Whole Foods and Wild Fork.
Lime juice – Again, freshly squeezed is best. Usually, about 3 lbs of fresh limes will give you enough.
Onion – Red or white, finely chopped.
Tomatoes – Go with the ripest tomatoes you can find. Core and remove the seeds. Cut into small bite-sized pieces.
Peppers – Jalapeño or Serrano are excellent choices. For less heat, remove all seeds and ribs on the inside of the chili. Serranos tend to pack more heat than a seeded jalapeño.
Olives – Pitted green are best. We recommend manzanillos for the most authentic flavor. Roughly chop them.
Cucumber – Peeled and halved then used the end of a spoon to remove the seeds. Cut into small bite-size pieces, about the same as the tomatoes.
Cilantro – Fresh is a must. Chopped.
Oil – Quality extra virgin is recommended.
Avocados – Ripe, but not overly soft. Don’t peel and chop them until just before bringing the ceviche together.
Orange juice – Freshly squeezed produces the best flavor.
Seasoning – Kosher salt is all you need.
Chips for Serving – Purchase some thin corn tortillas, cut them into triangles, and fry them up in some vegetable oil. Then lightly salt. Heavenly!

EXPERT TIP: Make sure to remove all of the shells and devein the shrimp before cutting them up. The freshly squeezed lime juice will produce perfectly ‘cooked’ ceviche. Allow them to ‘cook’ (or marinate) for a minimum of 30 minutes, but no longer than 4 hours. We find that 2 to 2½ hours is just right.

A person pouring freshly squeezed lime juice from a glass jar into a shallow white bowl that is filled with raw shrimp that has been cleaned and cut into bite-sized pieces.

Tips for Making Perfect Mexican Shrimp Ceviche

Use Fresh Shrimp – Select high-quality, fresh shrimp for the best flavor and texture. If possible, use wild-caught shrimp. Make sure to devein and peel them before cooking. If desired, you can lightly poach the shrimp in boiling water for a minute or two until they turn pink, then chill them in ice water.

Go With Fresh Lime Juice – The acidity from the fresh citrus will “cook” the shrimp while adding a bright flavor. Allow the shrimp to marinate for at least 30 minutes, or up to 4 hours. Discard the lime juice once the shrimp is “cooked.”

Fresh Is Always Best – Incorporate a variety of farm-fresh ingredients like diced tomatoes, red onion, cucumber, jalapeño, and cilantro. These add texture, color, and flavor. Adjust the ingredients based on your personal taste and desired level of heat.

Season Tortilla Chips Immediately – If frying, season the chips with salt right after they come out of the oil while they’re still hot. This helps the salt adhere better. You can also experiment with other seasonings like chili powder or lime zest for added flavor. Serve immediately for the best flavor and texture.

EXPERT TIP: It won’t take long for the shrimp to change in appearance once it has been covered with the fresh lime juice. The shrimp will become pink and opaque. Once it is ready, you can drain the liquid, and make the ceviche immediately, or you cover and refrigerate it for several hours if not used immediately.

A overhead view of a large silver slotted spoon holding up pieces of shrimp that have been cooked in freshly squeezed lime juice that appear below the raised spoon.

How To Serve

This is the quintessential seafood appetizer. Even non-seafood lovers like this dish.

It is wonderful served in individual bowls along with some freshly fried corn tortillas. Be sure to have hot sauce and extra lime on hand.

You can also serve in a large bowl (preferably over ice) and let guests serve themselves. They also make incredible tostadas and lettuce wraps.

An overhead view of a large colorful bowl filled with Mexican shrimp ceviche with two wooden spoons inserted into the sides of the dish.

Other Classic Mexican Seafood Recipes to Try

These are all amazing and authentic. But, in the meantime, isn’t this gorgeous recipe calling your name?

An overhead view of four servings of shrimp ceviche in glass bowls resting on colorful cocktail plates with corn tortilla chips and two glasses of beer nearby.

There is truly something magical about how the various components of this dish work together.

The sum is definitely greater than its parts with this dish.

It is one of the best seafood appetizers we have ever created, served, and eaten. Get ready for massive rave reviews!

Every bite will take you down to a gorgeous beach in beautiful Mexico.

A person holding a crispy corn tortilla chip that is holding a helping of Mexican shrimp ceviche.

Ready to make the best seafood appetizer this side of Cozumel, Mexico? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a small glass bowl that is filled with a serving of Mexican shrimp ceviche and is on a green cocktail plate with corn tortilla chips and a silver spoon on it.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Mexican Shrimp Ceviche

Mexican Shrimp Ceviche is one of the best seafood appetizers of all time. "Cooking" the shrimp (or white fish) in freshly squeezed lime juice produces deeply flavorful shrimp and that is melt-in-your-mouth delicious. If you have the time, fry up the corn tortillas in a little hot oil. It puts it all over the top.
Prep Time20 minutes
"Cook" time in the lime juice2 hours
Total Time2 hours 20 minutes
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: Mexican
Servings: 8
Calories: 94kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 1 lb shrimp peeled and deveined, as fresh as possible.
  • 1½ cups fresh lime juice usually from about 3 lbs of fresh limes
  • ¼ cup red onion finely chopped
  • 2 medium tomatoes cored and roughly diced
  • 1 jalapeño seeds removed and finely chopped
  • ½ cup green olives pitted, roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cucumber peeled, seeded, and roughly chopped
  • ¼ cup cilantro fresh, chopped
  • 2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 large avocado peeled, pitted, and roughly chopped
  • 2 tablespoon orange juice juice from 1 large orange
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • corn tortilla chips for serving
  • lime wedges, or wheels for garnish
  • hot sauce for serving

Instructions

  • Cut the shrimp into bite-sized pieces. Place in a shallow bowl and carefully pour the lime juice over the shrimp (the juice should cover all of the shrimp). Refrigerate for a minimum of 30 minutes and no more than 4 hours.
    1 lb shrimp, 1½ cups fresh lime juice
  • Drain the "cooked" shrimp through a sieve. Discard the lime juice.
  • Mix the shrimp, red onion, tomatoes, jalapeño, olives, cucumber, and cilantro, in a large serving bowl. Stir in the olive oil.
    ¼ cup red onion, 2 medium tomatoes, 1 jalapeño, ½ cup green olives, ½ cup cucumber, ¼ cup cilantro, 2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
  • Gently mix in the avocado, orange juice, and salt.
    1 large avocado, 2 tablespoon orange juice, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Serve at once with tortilla chips, lime garnish, and hot sauce, if desired.
    corn tortilla chips, lime wedges, or wheels, hot sauce

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
We usually allow the shrimp to "cook" for 2 to 3 hours. If you go longer than 4 hours, it will become too strong of a lime taste, and the shrimp will start to break down. If not serving immediately, you can drain the "cooked" shrimp and kept in an air-tight container with a lid in the fridge for up to 24 hours before assembling the ceviche. 
You can also include white fish such as skinless snapper, bass, halibut, or other ocean fish fillets. Cut them into bite-size pieces and submerge them in lime juice.
Leftover ceviche keeps nicely in the fridge (covered) for several days. For the freshest flavor, assemble the ceviche no more than 2 hours before serving to guests. 

Nutrition

Calories: 94kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 426mg | Potassium: 232mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 393IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 0.3mg

Homemade Cheesy Hamburger Helper

by 13 Comments

We’re not going to lie. Hamburger Helper is yummy. But, hold on. Homemade is always better.

We love taking classic dinners that so many of us have grown up eating and giving them a new twist. This is truly the perfect weeknight dinner. No fancy ingredients and it’s ready in about 30 minutes. Serve with simmered green beans and rolls for the perfect easy weeknight meal. Always a huge hit with kids and adults!

An overhead view of a large silver skillet filled with homemade cheesy hamburger helper garnished with finely chopped Italian parsley.

How To Make Homemade Cheesy Hamburger Helper

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As mentioned, many of the ingredients for this you very well may already have on hand. And if there any of these seasonings you don’t have on hand, you can leave them out (if you don’t have time to pick them up), and it will still be delicious.

Butter – Unsalted, or use oil, such as olive oil or vegetable oil.
Onion – Finely chopped. If you don’t like onion, just leave it out.
Beef – 85% lean is recommended.
Seasonings – Paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, dry mustard, salt, and pepper.
Worcestershire sauce – This adds a depth of flavor. You can substitute low sodium soy sauce.
Tomato sauce – The small can.
Beef broth – Or water, or chicken stock (or broth).
Cream – We prefer half and half, but you could go with milk (whole or 2%), or heavy cream.
Cheese – A block of your favorite cheese (ie, cheddar, Colby, Monterrey Jack) is best. Use a hand grater or your food processor to shred the cheese. Pre-shredded package cheese has a non-sticking additive.
Parsley – Finely chopped, for garnish. Optional.

EXPERT TIP: As mentioned, you can substitute whole milk for the half and half. For an extra silky sauce, you can use heavy cream. Bring the sauce to a slight simmer, not a heavy boil.

A person pouring half and half from a glass milk jug into a large skillet filled with a simmering red meat sauce.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Cheesy Hamburger Helper

Remove Excess Grease – After the beef is know longer pink, there will be some grease that was released. Grab a small bowl, tilt your skillet, and carefully spoon most of the grease out of the skillet. Leave about 1 tablespoon left for flavor. Discard the grease in a container with a lid, not down the drain.

Let the Seasonings “Blossom” – Stir the seasonings into the cooked meat before adding the liquid ingredients. This lets the aromatics from the spices “blossom” and release more flavor.

Shred the Cheese from a Block – Pre-shredded packaged cheese will work in a pinch. But, there are non-caking additives in shredded cheese. It’s not un-healthy, but doesn’t produce as a creamy of a sauce. Grab your box grater and grate a block of cheese for best results.

Thin Sauce, If Necessary – Have a little extra broth, cream, or water on hand. If the sauce feels too thick, simply add a little more liquid until you reach the desired consistency. The sauce will also thicken as it rests before you serve it.

A person dumping uncooked macaroni elbows from a glass bowl into a skillet filled with a creamy tomato and beef sauce.

How To Serve

This is the perfect one-pot wonder dish.

Simply place the skillet on the table and let the family serve themselves.

A green leaf lettuce is a nice side dish. Or simmered green beans and freshly baked biscuits.

EXPERT TIP: Shredding the cheese from a block of cheese makes a big difference in the texture of the sauce. Leave a little extra cheese to add to the top of the dish. It will melt from the residual heat.

A person dumping uncooked macaroni elbows from a glass bowl into a skillet filled with a creamy tomato and beef sauce.

Other Amazing Ground Beef Recipes to Try

Ground beef is versatile and wonderful in so many classic recipes. Here is a collection of our favorite recipes that we are certain you and your family will love!

Tex-Mex Pasta with Ground Beef

One-Pot Chili Mac
Slammin’ Sloppy Joes
Sloppy Joe Casserole
Best-Ever Meatloaf
Greek Moussaka (Ground Beef and Eggplant Casserole)
Guinness Ground Beef Pot Pie
Salisbury Steaks with Mushroom Gravy
Classic Spaghetti and Meatballs
Albondigas (Mexican-Style Meatballs)
Tex-Mex Beef Tacos

These are all absolutely amazing in every possible way. But, in the meantime, isn’t this calling your name?

A large wooden spoon being raised from a skillet that is filled with homemade cheesy hamburger helper with steam rising into the air above it.

We love this dish for so many reasons. First, and foremost, it’s delicious.

But, also, it comes together in only 30 minutes.

It’s easy to adapt to what you have on hand. And it is loved by both kids and adults alike. What’s better than that?

A close-up view of an orange dinner bowl filled with a serving of homemade cheesy hamburger helper.

If you’re in a crunch for time to get something satisfying and filling on the table that the entire family will love, this is the recipe for you.

You can even substitute ground turkey, or shredded rotisserie chicken in place of the beef, if desired.

We’re not knocking the boxed variety, it’s yummy, too. But, folks, homemade will always be better. And this is no exception to that rule!

A straight-on view of a fork being raised that has a helping of homemade cheesy hamburger help on it.

Ready to make a dinner that everyone in the house will love? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large silver skillet filled with homemade cheesy hamburger helper garnished with finely chopped Italian parsley.
Print Recipe
5 from 7 votes

Homemade Cheesy Hamburger Helper

Homemade is always better and this recipe is no exception. See NOTES for easy substitutions. The dish comes together in about 30 minutes and easily feeds a family of 4 to 5. Leftovers heat up beautifully with a dash more of milk or broth. Weeknight dinner perfection!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Resting time5 minutes
Total Time35 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 568kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Large skillet

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or olive oil
  • ½ cup onion chopped
  • 1 lb ground beef 85% lean
  • 1½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground mustard
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 8 oz can tomato sauce
  • 2 cups beef broth or water
  • 2 cups half and half or whole milk
  • 2 cups elbow macaroni
  • 1½ cups cheddar cheese shredded, preferably from a block
  • 2 tablespoon parsley fresh, chopped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Melt the butter over medium heat in a large skillet.
    1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Add the onion and sauté until soft, about 3 to 4 minutes. Add the ground beef and cook until no longer pink, about 5 minutes. Tilt the skillet to the side and spoon out most of the rendered grease. Discard safely.
    ½ cup onion, 1 lb ground beef
  • Season the beef with salt, pepper, paprika, chili powder, mustard, and garlic powder. Cook, stirring often, for about 1 minute. Stir in the Worcestershire sauce, tomato sauce, beef broth, and half and half. Stir to combine. Bring to a slight simmer and stir in the pasta. Simmer, stirring often, until the pasta is just cooked, about 10 to 12 minutes.
    1½ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon paprika, 1 teaspoon chili powder, 1 teaspoon ground mustard, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 8 oz can tomato sauce, 2 cups beef broth, 2 cups half and half, 2 cups elbow macaroni
  • Stir in 1 cup of the cheese and continue stirring until melted. Sprinkle the remaining half cup on the top, cover the skillet with the lid, and let rest for about 5 minutes. Serve at once, garnished with fresh chopped parsley, if desired.
    1½ cups cheddar cheese, 2 tablespoon parsley

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Don’t overcook the pasta with the sauce, otherwise the sauce may become too thick. If this happens, just thin the sauce with a splash or two of cream and/or broth. 
Leftovers will keep covered in the fridge for up to 1 week. Reheat on the stove with a few splashes of milk/cream and broth. 

Nutrition

Calories: 568kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 44g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 173mg | Sodium: 612mg | Potassium: 832mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1509IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 490mg | Iron: 4mg

Grilled Chicken Salad with Vegetables

by 2 Comments

This recipe is as beautiful in presentation as it is scrumptious in flavor.

We won’t say this incredible salad doesn’t take a little TLC. But, so much of it can be done in advance and it all comes together easily within an hour or two before serving. If possible, make the easy pesto sauce for the chicken. It’s always a huge hit when served to family and friends!

An overhead view of a grilled chicken salad salad that consists of rows of grilled pesto chicken, asparagus, mushrooms, and salads of cucumbers, tomatoes, and chickpeas.

How To Make Grilled Chicken Salad with Vegetables


NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As you can see, there are numerous components to this spectacular salad. But, that’s what makes it so amazing. You can adapt to your own tastes, but here are the ingredients we use to prepare the salad:

For the Ingredient

Vinegar – Red Wine is recommended, although balsamic would be a good substitution.
Lemon juice – Preferably fresh.
Mustard – Dijon is recommended.
Garlic – Minced.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper.
Oil – Extra virgin is recommended, but regular olive oil will work, too.

For the Cucumber Salad

Cucumbers – Medium-sized, peeled in strips, halved, and seeds removed.
Carrots – Julienned. Seek out ‘matchstick’ carrots in the produce section of many markets.
Dill – Fresh is best.
Salt – Kosher
For the Dressing – Red wine vinegar, Dijon mustard, and extra-virgin olive oil.

For the Chickpea Salad

Canned chickpeas – Also known as Garbanzo beans. Found in the canned beans section of your market. Drain and then rinse them.
Onion – Red or white, finely chopped.
Herbs – Fresh mint is our recommendation.
Vinaigrette – From what you’ve already prepared.
Seasonings – Salt and pepper.

Asparagus – Fresh, white ends cut off.
Mushrooms – Go with your favorite variety, but, button mushrooms work great.
Chicken – We love boneless, skinless thighs, but boneless, skinless breasts will work, too.
Pesto Sauce – Homemade is easy and wonderful, but store-bought will work, too.

For the Tomato Salad and Green Leaf Salad

Tomatoes – Find the ripest ones available. During the summertime, heirloom, or any farm-fresh variety is perfection.
Basil – Fresh is a must.
Green leaf – Green leaf lettuce or red leaf lettuce is perfect. Chop it into strips.
Vinaigrette – From what you’ve already prepared.

EXPERT TIP: Use an outdoor grill pan to easily cook the asparagus and mushroom. If you don’t have one of these, you can place them in a cast-iron skillet and place it directly on the grill. Keep an eye on them, they cook quickly!

A close-up view of a grill pan on a gas grill and is holding a pile of asparagus and quartered pieces of white button mushrooms.

Tips for Making Perfect Grilled Chicken Salad

Make the Easy Pesto Sauce – Store-bought is just fine, but making it from scratch really puts the chicken over the top.

Choose Seasonal Vegetables – We’ve provided our favorite vegetables to prepare and serve with the grilled chicken, but feel free to use a variety of fresh, seasonal vegetables for grilling, such as bell peppers, zucchini, and, of course, asparagus. Farm fresh is always best.

Grill at the Right Temperature – Preheat your grill to medium-high heat to achieve a nice char on the chicken and vegetables without overcooking; this will help seal in juices and enhance the overall taste. The internal temperature of the chicken should be 165°F.

Whisk the Vinaigrette Well – For a balanced homemade red wine vinaigrette, whisk together the vinegar, olive oil, Dijon mustard, salt, and pepper until emulsified; taste and adjust the seasoning to ensure it complements the flavors of the salad perfectly. A jar with a tight-fitting lid works wonders.

EXPERT TIP: If desired, you can serve the chicken soon after it comes off the grill, while it’s still hot. But, we recommend letting it cool enough to handle, and then cut it into nice large bite-size pieces and then coat it in the pesto. Don’t over-dress the chicken with the pesto, unless you like with extra pesto!

A person transferring homemade pesto sauce from a small glass bowl into a larger glass bowl filled with grilled chicken thighs that have been cut into bite-size pieces.

How To Serve

This grilled chicken salad is a show-stopper, without a doubt. All components are perfectly delicious when served at room temperature. This means so much of the salad can be prepped well in advance of serving.

We love serving the salad on a large circular platter. But, you could also serve it on a large cutting board or oval platter.

Colorfully arrange the vegetables and chicken. Then, set out a couple of large serving spoons, plates, and cutlery, and let guests serve themselves.

It is the perfect dish for entertaining. Be sure to have the extra vinaigrette available for folks to drizzle more if desired.

A person pouring a red wine vinaigrette from a small glass jar over a platter filled with rows of grilled mushrooms, cucumber salad, and grilled chicken pieces.

Other Amazing Warm-Weather Salad Recipes to Try

These are all simply amazing. But, in the meantime, isn’t this incredible salad calling your name?

A close-up view of a grilled chicken salad with vegetables on a large white platter with a jar of vinaigrette sitting nearby.

Folks, if you’re looking for something new, and a little different to serve to guests during the warm months, this salad is about as good as it gets.

Since most of the ingredients can be prepped up to a day in advance, it makes assembly a snap.

Every time we serve this salad, guests can not stop raving about it. It’s really that good.

A close-up view of a grilled chicken salad that also has cucumbers, tomato wedges, mushrooms, and asparagus on the plate.

Ready to make the freshest, most beautiful salad in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a grilled chicken salad salad that consists of rows of grilled pesto chicken, asparagus, mushrooms, and salads of cucumbers, tomatoes, and chickpeas.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Amazing Grilled Chicken Salad

This Grilled Chicken Salad is truly stunning and always a huge hit! Nothing is too difficult to produce, but it's a lot to tackle in one single effort. Fortunately, much of the salad can be made up to a day in advance. We've indicated that in the recipe. Use a perforated grill pan to cook the asparagus and mushrooms, or you can cook them in a skillet with a little oil over medium heat.
Prep Time1 hour 30 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Total Time2 hours
Course: Salad
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6 people
Calories: 468kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

Do Ahead - Make the Vinaigrette and Easy Pesto

For the Vinaigrette

  • 5 tablespoon red-wine vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 garlic cloves minced
  • ½ teaspoon sugar
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¾ cup extra-virgin olive oil

For the Pesto

For the Cucumber Carrot Salad

  • 2 medium cucumbers peeled, halved and seeds removed with spoon
  • ½ cup carrots julienned (packaged 'match stick' carrots work well)
  • 2 tablespoon dill fresh, chopped
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil

For the Chickpea Salad

  • 1 15 oz cans chickpeas rinsed and drained
  • ¼ cup red onion finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh mint chopped

For the Grilled Asparagus, Mushrooms, and Chicken

  • 2 lbs chicken thighs skinless, boneless
  • Olive oil
  • Salt and pepper
  • 1 bunch asparagus ends trimmed and thick part peeled
  • 8 oz button mushrooms halved, or quartered
  • ½ cup pesto click for recipe, or use quality store brand

For the Tomato Salad and Lettuce Salad

  • 2 medium ripe tomatoes cut into ½-inch wedges
  • ¼ cup basil fresh, chopped
  • 2 cups green leaf lettuce thinly sliced

Instructions

Make the Vinaigrette

  • In a jar, or small bowl, whisk together all ingredients, except the oil.
    5 tablespoon red-wine vinegar, 2 tablespoon fresh lemon juice, 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 2 garlic cloves, ½ teaspoon sugar, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, ¾ cup extra-virgin olive oil
  • Add oil in a slow stream, whisking until emulsified (if using jar, add lid and shake vigorously).
    Pesto sauce

Make the Cucumber Carrot Salad and Chickpea Salad

  • In a medium bowl, toss the cucumbers and carrots with the other ingredients until fully coated.
    2 medium cucumbers, ½ cup carrots, 2 tablespoon dill, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar, 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil
  • In another bowl, stir together chickpeas, onion, mint, 2 tablespoon of the vinaigrette, and a pinch each of salt and pepper.
    1 15 oz cans chickpeas, ¼ cup red onion, 1 tablespoon fresh mint

Grill the Chicken, Asparagus, and Mushrooms

  • Heat your grill to medium heat.
  • Brush the chicken all over with a little oil and then liberally season with salt and pepper. Grill the chicken until lightly charred and cooked through (165°F). Remove from the heat and let cool while you prepare the asparagus and mushrooms.
    2 lbs chicken thighs, Olive oil, Salt and pepper
  • Toss the asparagus and mushrooms in a couple of tablespoons (each) of the prepared vinaigrette. Place on a grill pan (or cast-iron skillet) and place over direct heat on the grill. Use a pair of tongs or a large spoon to move the asparagus and mushrooms around until softened, and lightly charred. Remove from the heat, place on a platter (or bowl), and toss with another couple of tbsps of the vinaigrette. Set aside.
    1 bunch asparagus, 8 oz button mushrooms
  • Cut the chicken into large bite-sized pieces and place in a bowl. Transfer about ½-cup of the pesto to the bowl and gently toss with a wooden spatula until lightly coated. Set aside.
    ½ cup pesto

Make the Tomato Salad and Lettuce Salad

  • Toss tomatoes with 1 to 2 tablespoons of the vinaigrette, the basil, and a pinch each of salt and pepper.
    2 medium ripe tomatoes, ¼ cup basil
  • Toss the lettuce with 1 tablespoon vinaigrette.
    2 cups green leaf lettuce

Assemble the Salad

  • Arrange the chicken, mushrooms, and salads side by side on a large platter and pass the remaining vinaigrette on the side.

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
All of the prep work can be done for all of the salads up to 12 hours in advance. Prepare the salad no more than 2 hours before serving. If you make them too far in advance, they can become soggy. The chicken can be prepared several hours in advance. The pesto and vinaigrette can be made 24 hours in advance. 
 

Nutrition

Calories: 468kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 150mg | Sodium: 852mg | Potassium: 866mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 4265IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 4mg

POST UPDATE: This was originally published in April 2017, but was updated with improved tweaks to the recipe with new tips and photography and a fabulous new video in July 2024!

Homemade Mint Chocolate Chip Ice Cream

by 2 Comments

It’s hard to imagine a more beloved dessert treat than ice cream. Especially when we’re talking homemade ice cream.

The depth of flavor in this homemade ice cream is amazing. Steeping the fresh mint in the warm sweet cream mixture delivers an incredibly fresh mint taste that is not overpowering, but simply heavenly. Use this ice cream with double chocolate chip cookies to make the most epic ice cream cookie sandwiches in the world!

A straight-on view of a white ice cream bowl filled with four scoops of homemade mint chocolate chip ice cream with a spoon inserted into the back of the bowl.

How To Make Homemade Mint Chocolate Chip Ice Cream

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

Go with top-notch ingredients for the best flavor and texture. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Milk – Whole milk is a must.
Cream – Heavy cream of double cream.
Mint – Fresh is essential, and only the leaves are needed.
Egg yolks – The fresher the better.
Vanilla extract – We love Nielsen-Massey.
Green food coloring – Seek out vegetable-based food coloring, without dyes or corn syrup. They can be found in the baking section of most well-stocked supermarkets. Or, online.
Chocolate – Semisweet or bittersweet. Found in the baking section of your market.
Oil – Canola is recommended, but vegetable oil will also work. Nothing that will impart any flavor (such as olive oil).

The Ice Cream Maker We Used to Make This Ice Cream

Go with your favorite method of churning ice cream, just be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions. For this version, we use our Cuisinart Fully-Automatic Electric Ice Cream Maker.

EXPERT TIP: We recommend allowing the mint to steep in the hot cream mixture for about 20 minutes for a distinct mint taste. If you want a subtle mint taste, then allow it to steep for 10 to 15 minutes.

Four images with first being fresh mint going into saucepan of simmering cream and then cream into bowl of whisked eggs then the mixture through a sieve into a glass bowl and then green food coloring being poured into the mixture.

Tips for Making Perfect Homemade Mint Chocolate Chip Ice Cream

Use Fresh Mint Leaves – For the best flavor, steep fresh mint leaves in the cream and milk mixture to extract a vibrant minty essence, then strain out the leaves before adding any other ingredients.

Opt for High-Quality Chocolate – Use high-quality semi-sweet or dark chocolate chips for the best taste and texture; you can also chop up a chocolate bar for larger chunks that add a delightful bite to each scoop.

Chill The Custard Thoroughly – After combining the ingredients, chill the ice cream base in the refrigerator for several hours or overnight before churning; this ensures a smoother texture and better flavor development.

EXPERT TIP: The ice cream is ready to transfer to a container when it reaches a thick whipped cream consistency is reached. Freeze in the container for at least 3 hours, but, overnight is best. We use Tovolo Ice Cream Containers.

Three images with the first being green custard being poured into an electric ice cream maker and then chocolate being drizzled into the freezing custard and then the soft ice cream being transferred into a container.

How To Serve

After the ice cream has had plenty of time to completely freeze, we recommend letting it sit out on the counter for about 15 minutes to soften somewhat.

The ice cream is incredible on its own served in a chilled bowl. A drizzle of chocolate sauce is a nice touch.

Or served on a cone.

But, if you really want to take things to the next level. Make a batch of our Double Chocolate Chip Cookies and make epic ice cream cookie sandwiches. They can be kept frozen until ready to serve. Your guests will be blown away.

A person holding a mint chocolate chip ice cream sandwich with the ice cream sandwiches between two double chocolate chip cookies.

Other Classic Homemade Ice Cream Recipes to Try

Ice cream is universally loved, and here is a collection of our all-time favorites that are so much fun to make at home. You and your loved ones will love them!

Classic Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream
Blueberry Ice Cream
S’Mores Ice Cream
Strawberry Ice Cream
Creamy Salted Caramel Ice Cream
Chocolate Peanut Butter Cup Ice Cream Cake

These are all nothing short of amazing and you should try them all. But, in the meantime, isn’t this frozen sweet concoction calling your name?

A person holding an old-fashioned ice cream cone with two large scoops of mint chocolate chip ice cream piled on top.

There are so many reasons to celebrate this incredibly delicious ice cream.

It’s festive. It conjures happy memories. And more than anything, it is incredibly delicious.

If you want to make an ice cream treat that will leave your guests begging for more, make the ice cream cookie sandwiches with our Double Chocolate Chip Cookies. Epic hardly describes it!

A close-up view of a mint chocolate chip ice cream cookie sandwich with a bite take out of it and sitting on a white dessert plate.

Ready to make the best ice cream on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a white ice cream bowl filled with four scoops of homemade mint chocolate chip ice cream with a spoon inserted into the back of the bowl.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Homemade Mint Chocolate Chip Ice Cream

There's nothing much better than homemade ice cream. This mint chocolate chip truly rivals even the best ice cream shoppe in town. Be sure to get fresh mint and top-notch chocolate. And, to put it over the top, make ice cream cookie sandwiches with our Double Chocolate Chip Cookies.
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time40 minutes
Chill time12 hours
Total Time13 hours
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 368kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 1½ cups whole milk divided
  • 1½ cups heavy cream divided
  • ⅔ cup sugar divided
  • 1 cup mint leaves fresh
  • 4 egg yolks
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 0.3 fl oz green food coloring optional
  • 4 oz semisweet chocolate roughly chopped
  • 2 teaspoon canola oil

Instructions

  • In a medium-sized saucepan, combine 1 cup of the milk, 1 cup of the heavy cream, ⅓ cup of the sugar, and the mint leaves. Heat over medium heat and simmer, stirring frequently with a wooden spoon, until bubbles form around the edges and the sugar has dissolved, about 5 to 8 minutes. Do not let it come to a boil.
    1½ cups whole milk, 1½ cups heavy cream, ⅔ cup sugar, 1 cup mint leaves
  • Remove the cream mixture from the heat and let stand for 15 to 20 minutes.
  • In a bowl, whisk together the egg yolks, the remaining ½ cup milk, the remaining ½ cup heavy cream, the remaining ⅓ cup sugar, and the vanilla extract until well blended.
    4 egg yolks, ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Return the cream/mint mixture back to medium heat until bubbles begin to form around the edges, about 4 to 5 minutes. Remove from the heat. Whisk the egg yolk mixture and begin slowly pouring the hot cream mixture into it. When almost all of the hot liquid has been added, slowly pour the warmed yolk mixture back into the saucepan, whisking constantly. Place the saucepan over medium heat and cook, stirring often, until the custard is thick enough to coat the back of the spoon, about 4 to 5 minutes.
  • Strain the custard through a sieve into a medium-sized clean bowl, gently pressing the liquid through the sieve and leaving any solids in the sieve. Place the bowl into another large bowl. Carefully add ice water around the bowl with the custard and let it cool for 30 to 40 minutes. Stir in the food coloring until fully combined. Place a piece of plastic wrap over the surface of the custard and another piece of plastic over the top of the bowl. Chill in the refrigerator for 3 to 24 hours.
    0.3 fl oz green food coloring
  • Melt the chocolate in a double boiler or in a pan over gently simmering water on the stove. Set aside to cool.
    4 oz semisweet chocolate
  • Pour the custard into your ice cream maker and churn until the custard reaches the consistency of thick whipped cream.
  • Stir the canola oil into the cooled, melted chocolate. During the last few minutes of churning, drizzle the chocolate mixture into the ice cream maker and continue to churn until small slivers of chocolate form.
    2 teaspoon canola oil
  • Transfer to a plastic freezer container, cover, and freeze until firm, 4 hours, or up to 3 days.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Vegetable-based, non-dye food coloring can be found in the baking section of most well-stocked supermarkets. Check the label. 
For best results, allow the ice cream to freeze in the freezer for 8 to 10 hours. For easy scooping, let the ice cream set out on the counter for 10 to 15 minutes before serving. 
The ice cream will keep in the freezer for several weeks. 

Nutrition

Calories: 368kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 154mg | Sodium: 37mg | Potassium: 234mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 25g | Vitamin A: 1106IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 120mg | Iron: 1mg

Double Chocolate Chip Cookies

by Leave a Comment

If you love cookies and if you love chocolate, you’ll want to make this recipe immediately.

This has become one of our favorite cookies to make. The taste is pure chocolate and the texture is soft and chewy. A cookie lover’s dream come true. We love to make ice cream sandwiches with them and our mint chocolate chip ice cream! Dessert heaven! These rival our classic favorite cookies such as Oatmeal Raisin and Snickerdoodles!

An overhead view of a pile of double chocolate chip cookies sitting on a white plate.

How To Make Double Chocolate Chip Cookies

 

NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

As you can imagine, chocolate is the key ingredient in these cookies, in fact, we go with two kinds (hence the name!). All should be easy to find in the baking aisle of your local grocery store. Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Bittersweet chocolate – Go with a top-notch brand, if possible. We love Ghirardelli which can be found in most supermarkets.
Butter – Unsalted.
Flour – All-purpose.
Baking powder – Check the expiration date, make sure it hasn’t expired.
Eggs – At room temperature.
Sugar – Granulated.
Vanilla extract – We love Nielsen-Massey.
Chocolate chips – Semisweet or milk chocolate. For these cookies, we recommend semisweet.

EXPERT TIP: Try not to over-mix the batter. To get the softest, chewiest cookies, you’ll want to stir until just combined. The consistency is not as dense as store-bought cookie dough. It’s like a very thick cake batter.

An overhead view of a large glass bowl filled with double chocolate chip cookie batter with a wooden spoon inserted in the side.

Tips for Making Perfect Double Chocolate Chip Cookies

Use High-Quality Chocolate – For the richest flavor, choose high-quality dark chocolate or semi-sweet chocolate chips. The better the quality of the chocolate, the tastier the cookies.

Chill the Dough – After mixing your cookie dough, chill it in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes before baking; this helps the cookies maintain their shape and enhances the overall flavor. Don’t skip this step, if possible.

Don’t Over-mix the Dough – When combining the dry ingredients with the wet ingredients, mix just until incorporated to avoid overdeveloping the gluten, which can lead to tough cookies.

Use Silicone Matts, if Possible – Silicone matts will help the cookies bake evenly and not burn on the bottoms. Parchment paper is an acceptable alternative. Remember to rotate the baking sheet 180° after 6 minutes.

EXPERT TIP: These cookies will spread a little as they bake, but not a lot. Use a tablespoon and a small spoon to scrape the dough onto the prepared cookie sheet. Flatten the dough a little with your fingers or the back of a spoon.

A person using a small spoon to scrape chocolate cookie dough out of a tablespoon onto a silicone baking matt.

How To Serve

These cookies are irresistible when they come right out of the oven. However, we do recommend that you let them cool somewhat before serving.

They will keep in an airtight container on the counter for up to 2 weeks.

Of course, they are wonderful with a tall glass of cold milk, with some vanilla ice cream, or our favorite, as part of an ice cream sandwich. Check out this epic Chocolate Mint Ice Cream Sandwich!

A person holding a mint chocolate chip ice cream sandwich with the ice cream sandwiches between two double chocolate chip cookies.

Other Chocolate Sweet Treat Recipes to Try

If you and your loved ones love chocolate, this collection of chocolate-forward recipes is sure to please. They sure do please us!

Chocolate Chunk Cookies
Chocolate Delight
Classic Chocolate Meringue Pie
Triple Chocolate Mousse Cake
Best-Ever Fudge Brownies
Chocolate Cupcakes with Marshmallow Filling
Classic Chocolate Cake
German Chocolate Cake

These are all amazing, without a doubt. But, in the meantime, aren’t these babies catching your eye?

A straight-on view of a cookie sheet that is lined with a silicone baking mat and is topped with freshly baked double chocolate chip cookies.

These cookies are always a huge hit when we serve them.

They are great all year long, and especially great during the holiday season. Kids and adults can’t get enough of them.

In fact, they are so good, that you might want to consider making a double batch!

A close-up view of a pile of double chocolate chip cookies sitting on a white plate.

Ready to make the best cookies in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag #HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a pile of double chocolate chip cookies sitting on a white plate.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Double Chocolate Chip Cookies

These cookies are a chocolate lover's dream come true. Seek out good-quality chocolate and you and your family will be thrilled with the results. Chewy and so chocolatey. This recipe makes about 36 cookies.
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time10 minutes
Cooling Time30 minutes
Total Time1 hour
Course: Dessert / Snack
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 568kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Double boiler or pan over simmering water
  • Silicone baking mats or parchment paper
  • 2 baking / cookie sheets

Ingredients

  • 8 oz semisweet chocolate roughly chopped
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 3 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
  • 2 large eggs room temperature
  • ⅔ cup sugar
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1⅔ cup semisweet chocolate chips

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F. Line two baking sheets with silicone baking mats or parchment paper.
  • Use a double boiler (or a heatproof bowl over a pan of simmering water) to melt the chocolate (not the chips) and butter. Remove from the heat and allow to cool slightly.
    8 oz semisweet chocolate, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Sift together the flour and baking powder into a bowl. Set aside.
    3 tablespoon all-purpose flour, ¼ teaspoon baking powder
  • Use a hand mixer in a large bowl to beat together the eggs, sugar, and vanilla on high until light and fluffy, about 5 minutes.
    2 large eggs, ⅔ cup sugar, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • Use a wooden spoon or spatula to fold in the chocolate mixture just until combined. Next, fold in the flour until combined. Don't over-mix. Stir in the chocolate chips.
    1⅔ cup semisweet chocolate chips
  • Use a tablespoon and a small spoon to add mounds of the dough onto the prepared baking sheets. Spacing them about 1½ inches apart. Lightly flatten the mounds with the back of a spoon.
  • Bake the cookies, 1 baking at a time, on the middle rack in the oven for 6 minutes. Rotate the baking sheet around and bake for another 4 minutes. Repeat with the second baking sheet of cookies. At this point, the cookies will be very soft. Let the cookies cool on the baking sheets on wire racks. Remove with a spatula and store in an airtight container on the counter for up to 2 weeks.

Video

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you liked the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
Bittersweet chocolate can be substituted for the semisweet. If desired, select any kind of chips for your cookies, such as milk chocolate, white chocolate, or butterscotch. 
Cookies will keep in an air-tight container on the counter for up to 2 weeks. 

Nutrition

Calories: 568kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 59mg | Sodium: 26mg | Potassium: 475mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 45g | Vitamin A: 194IU | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 5mg

Tomato Galette with Gruyère and Caramelized Onions

by 7 Comments

This is our go-to appetizer when serving guests, especially when tomatoes are in season.

If there was ever a combination of flavors that worked better than the ones in this galette, we’ve yet to discover it. The homemade crust is simple to prepare but really puts it over the top! Serve with a nice chilled dry white wine for the perfect midday, summer treat. Truly spectacular!

A straight-on view of a baked tomato galette with gruyere cheese and caramelized onions sitting next to a sprig of thyme and two tomatoes on a vine.

How To Make Tomato Galette with Gruyère and Caramelized Onions


NOTE: If you liked this video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. Remember to click the little ‘bell’ icon so you’ll never miss a new video. Thank you!

The Ingredients You Will Need

There are just a handful of ingredients needed for this pastry. We can’t emphasize enough how much of a difference the homemade dough makes! Here’s what you’ll need to have on hand:

Pie dough – If you have a food processor, our perfect pie crust is a snap to make and takes the galette to another level. However, quality store-bought dough is good, too.
Oil – Olive oil or extra virgin olive oil is best. However, canola or melted butter can work, too. It’s for caramelizing the onions.
Onion – One large yellow or white onion. Thinly sliced.
Gruyère cheese – Preferably purchased as a block and then shredded. Fontina or gouda are both perfectly acceptable substitutions. Shredded mozzarella will work, too.
Tomatoes – Ripe, juicy tomatoes are best. Preferably farm-fresh. Heirlooms are wonderful. If you can’t find any of these, go with sliced Roma tomatoes. They are juicy and will produce a wonderful taste and texture.
Seasonings – Salt, pepper, and freshly chopped thyme. Rosemary, oregano, or tarragon are all great substitutions for the thyme.
Egg – One beaten egg combined with water to create an egg wash. This helps to make the crust nice and golden as it bakes.

EXPERT TIP: If possible, use a heavy rolling pin to roll the dough out. The dough should be 10 to 12 inches in diameter. Don’t worry if the edges are a little scraggly.

Two images with the first being a person sprinkling shredded Gruyere over caramelized onions in the middle of pid dough and then a person placing sliced tomatoes over the cheese.

Tips for Making a Perfect Tomato Galette

Chill the Dough Before Assembling – After making the homemade crust, chill it in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes before rolling it out and assembling the galette. This helps the dough relax and makes it easier to work with, resulting in a flakier and more tender crust.

Caramelize the Onions Slowly – Take your time when caramelizing the onions to bring out their natural sweetness and depth of flavor. Cook them low and slow in butter or olive oil until they turn a deep golden brown, stirring occasionally to prevent burning.

Use Ripe, Flavorful Tomatoes – Choose ripe, juicy tomatoes for the best flavor in your galette. Look for heirloom or vine-ripened tomatoes, as they will have the best flavor and texture for this dish.

Grate the Gruyere Cheese – Grate the Gruyere cheese just before assembling the galette to ensure it’s at its freshest. Using freshly grated cheese will give the galette a rich and creamy texture when it melts during baking.

Allow the Galette to Rest – Resist cutting into the galette soon after you remove it from the heat. The juices from the tomatoes need a little time to settle into the cheese and onions. 15 minutes is ideal.

EXPERT TIP: Be sure to give enough space to fold the edges of the dough of the dough back towards the center. You don’t want to completely cover the tomatoes, leave an opening so most of the tomatoes are visible.

A person folding over homemade pie dough over a pile of caramelized onions, shredded Gruyere cheese, and sliced tomatoes.

How To Serve

This is ideal to serve as an appetizer before a wonderful feast. But, it’s also great to serve as a treat mid-afternoon.

You can also serve it warm or at room temperature. We prefer it warm, but, as you will find, it’s wonderful room temperature, too.

We like to slice it up like a pizza or a freshly baked pie and then let guests grab their own serving.

It pairs wonderfully with dry white wine, such as Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc. But, it’s also wonderful with a robust red wine such as Zinfandel or Pinot Noir.

An overhead view of a baked galette that is filled with roasted sliced tomatoes sitting on top of melted cheese and is sitting on crumpled butcher paper.

Other Amazing Recipes Featuring Tomatoes To Try

If you love juicy, flavorful tomatoes as much as we do, you are going to flip for this collection of incredible recipes featuring that glorious red fruit:

These are all amazing, without a doubt. But, in the meantime, isn’t the galette calling your name?

A sliced of a tomato galette being raised up on a large stainless steel knife.

If we had to pick one appetizer that consistently gets the most raves when we serve it to guests, it would be this tomato galette.

Most folks comment about the comforting combination of flavors. But, everyone comments on the homemade crust.

It all comes together to make an incredibly delicious savory pastry that is not difficult to prepare!

A straight-on view of a half eaten slice of a tomato galette that is layer with roasted tomatoes, gruyere cheese, and caramelized onions.

Ready to make the best savory pastry in town? Go for it!

When you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a baked tomato galette with gruyere cheese and caramelized onions sitting next to a glass of white wine and two tomatoes.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Tomato Galette with Gruyere and Caramelized Onions

This savory galette is one of the best savory pastries you will ever make, serve, and eat. The homemade crust is easy (with a food processor) and puts the galette in a category all of its own. Give yourself time to caramelize the onions. It's wonderful served warm or at room temperature.
Prep Time25 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 10 minutes
Resting Time15 minutes
Total Time1 hour 50 minutes
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American / French
Servings: 6
Calories: 343kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Food processor if making the dough from scratch (recommended)
  • Pizza stone or baking sheet

Ingredients

  • 1 9-inch pie dough (click link for recipe)
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 large onion thinly sliced
  • 1 tablespoon semolina flour or fine cornmeal (optional)
  • 6 oz Gruyere cheese shredded
  • 3 ripe tomatoes sliced
  • Salt and pepper
  • 1 tablespoon thyme fresh, chopped
  • 1 large egg beaten, combined with 1 tablespoon water

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Make the pie dough. Wrap in plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes or for up to 24 hours. If frozen, allow the dough to thaw completely.
    1 9-inch pie dough

Make the Galette

  • In a large skillet, heat the oil over medium-high heat. Add the onions and cook until browned all over, stirring frequently. About 30 to 40 minutes. Set aside.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 large onion
  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • On a lightly floured surface roll out the dough to a circular shape about 10 to 12 inches in diameter. Add more flour to the surface as needed to prevent sticking.
  • Gently transfer the dough to a pizza stone or baking sheet. (Before doing this, you can sprinkle the stone or baking sheet with semolina flour or fine cornmeal. This isn't completely necessary, but helps to ensure the dough won't stick to the stone).
    1 tablespoon semolina flour
  • Add the caramelized onions in the center of the dough, leaving about 1 to 2 inches of dough around the edges. Place the cheese over the onions, and then arrange the tomato slices over the cheese (you may not use all of the tomato slices).
    6 oz Gruyere cheese, 3 ripe tomatoes
  • Liberally sprinkle salt and pepper over all of the tomatoes and then sprinkle on the chopped thyme.
    Salt and pepper, 1 tablespoon thyme
  • Use your hands to gently pull the edges of the dough toward the center of the galette. Bring the sides of the dough so about ⅔ of the tomatoes are visible.
  • In a small bowl, mix the lightly beaten egg with 1 tablespoon of water. Brush the egg wash all over the top portion of the dough.
    1 large egg
  • Bake for 35 to 40 minutes, or until the dough is lightly browned and the interior is bubbly. Use a couple of flat spatulas to gently transfer the galette from the stone (or baking sheet) to a cutting board. Allow to rest for 15 minutes before slicing. Serve warm or at room temperature.

Notes

See the video near the top of the blog post for visual guidance. If you like the video, please subscribe to our YouTube channel. 
The pie dough can be made up to 24 hours in advance. It can be frozen for 2 to 3 months. Allow to completely thaw before rolling out. 
After the galette has been baked and has rested for 10 to 15 minutes, use a flat spatula (preferably metal) to gently loosen the galette from the stone (or baking sheet). If possible, use two large spatulas to lift and transfer the galette to a cutting board. 
Leftovers will keep wrapped for several days. Reheat in a low-temp oven (300°F) until warmed, or heat in the microwave. 

Nutrition

Calories: 343kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 60g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 62mg | Sodium: 352mg | Potassium: 116mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 374IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 308mg | Iron: 1mg